JP5867931B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  Further, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and draws the extracted random number value for each role. Based on the internal lottery table in which the values are specified, it is determined whether or not it is allowed to have a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery”), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is determined. The reels are controlled to stop based on the combination that is allowed to be aligned on the effective line (hereinafter referred to as “winning combination”) and the player's stop button operation, and the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line. To stop display.

  At this time, if no winning combination is won in the internal lottery (that is, “losing”), the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is displayed no matter what timing the stop button is operated. Not. In addition, depending on the combination determined as the winning combination, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to the combination will not be stopped on the active line, or the stop button is operated at any timing The combination of symbols related to the combination is stopped and displayed on the active line even if the operation is performed. Furthermore, depending on the combination determined as the winning combination, there is a combination in which a combination of symbols related to the combination is not displayed unless the operation sequence of the plurality of stop buttons is an appropriate operation sequence.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined to be a winning combination where the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line unless the stop button is operated in the appropriate operation order, the appropriate timing is determined. In addition, since a stop operation in an appropriate operation order is required, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line, the game machine shifts to a relatively advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”) for the player. Is done. Here, the specific state is a bonus game (“RB (Regular Bonus)”, “BB (Big Bonus)”, “CB (Challenge Bonus)) that improves the probability that a winning combination is determined as a winning combination. ”“ MB (Middle Bonus) ”, etc.) or the combination of symbols related to the winning combination is not displayed unless the stop button is operated in an appropriate operation order (or if multiple winning combinations are winning at the same time, When a specific winning combination is determined (a combination of symbols that is relatively unfavorable to the player is displayed), an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that informs an appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc. ), By operating the start lever without performing the game value input operation, the probability that the re-game allowed to start the game is determined as the winning combination is improved. Play time (hereinafter also referred to as "RT"), assist replay time that AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ART"), and the like. Therefore, the player plays the game while desiring to shift to a relatively advantageous state for the player.

  2. Description of the Related Art Recently, there is a gaming machine that performs a freezing effect that is advantageous to a player after three games or a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won when a predetermined winning combination is won (for example, Patent Document 1). . When such a gaming machine is determined to perform a freeze effect, the number of AT games is increased. On the other hand, when it is determined not to perform a freeze effect, the probability of adding an AT game number is determined. Is low, the expected value of the number of games to be added is reduced, and if a predetermined winning combination is won in a state where it is determined to execute a freeze effect after 3 games, the freeze effect is executed after 3 games Compared to a state in which it is not determined to perform, control is performed such that the probability of adding the number of AT games is high and the expected value of the number of added games is also increased. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause a disadvantage to the player at the timing of winning a predetermined winning combination.

JP 2013-1119013 A

  However, such a gaming machine has a problem that the player cannot maintain a sense of expectation when a freeze effect that is advantageous to the player is not executed.

  In view of such problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain a sense of expectation even when a freeze effect advantageous to a player is not executed.

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on detection of a start operation by the detecting means, an information notifying unit for notifying information related to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, and a specific In the state where the operation by the player is invalidated by the invalidation control means, the invalidation control means for performing the control to invalidate the operation by the player for a predetermined time based on that the condition of It is decided to execute the spinning effect by the spinning effect execution determining means for determining to execute the spinning effect in which the variable display of a plurality of symbols is performed, and the spinning effect execution determining means. In the case where it is determined that the first spinning effect is to be executed by the spinning effect execution control means for performing the control for executing the spinning effect and the spinning effect execution determination unit, the information By the specific state transition control means for performing control to shift to the specific state in which the information related to the winning combination is notified over a plurality of games by the notification means, and the rotation effect execution execution determination means, until the predetermined timing, When it is decided to execute the second spinning effect that executes the spinning effect in a different mode after the predetermined timing while executing the spinning effect in the same manner as the first spinning effect. Specific state transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift to the specific state, and the specific state transition control in a state in which the first spinning effect is being executed by the rotating effect execution control means. hand Wherein that the control shifts to a particular state is performed even after than the predetermined timing, the first specific state transition informing means for informing during execution of the first rotating cylinder effect, the specific state transition by When the decision means decides to shift to the specific state, it is notified after the second turning effect is executed that the control to shift to the specific state is performed by the specific state transition control means. Second specific state transition notifying means, and the specific state transition control means transitions to the specific state based on the fact that the specific state transition determination means has determined to shift to the specific state. It is characterized by performing control.

  Here, “information related to the winning combination” refers to information for displaying a combination of symbols related to the winning combination on the active line. For example, (a) the operation order of the stop button and (b) a combination of symbols related to the winning combination can be applied. In addition, when there are a plurality of symbol combinations related to the winning combination, it may be information for displaying some symbol combinations on the effective line, or all symbol combinations may be displayed on the effective line. Information may be used.

  The “specific conditions” may be applied to (a) winning a lottery, (b) playing a predetermined number of games, and the like.

  In addition, the “specific state” refers to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player because the information notification unit is notified of the information related to the winning combination over a plurality of games. For example, (a) ART, (b) AT, etc. can be applied as the specific state.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the state where the first spinning effect is executed by the spinning effect execution control unit, control for shifting to the specific state is performed by the specific state transition control unit. Control to shift to the specific state by the specific state transition control unit when the transition to the specific state is determined by the first specific state transition notifying unit and the specific state transition determining unit. A second specific state transition notifying unit for notifying that the first specific state transition is being performed, and the first specific state transition notifying unit is configured to perform control for shifting to the specific state by the specific state transition control unit. The second specific state transition notifying means performs control to shift to the specific state by the specific state transition control means at a second time different from the first time. Wherein the notifying be.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can maintain a sense of expectation even when the first spinning performance is not executed.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a stepping motor. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows an example of a design code table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "05". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "06". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is "07". It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning area, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT0. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT1. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT2. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT3. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT4. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT5. It is a figure which shows an example of a rotation effect table. It is a figure which shows an example of a spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation block tables 1-3. It is a figure which shows an example of production block tables 4-9. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 1-10. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 11-20. It is a figure which shows an example of production | presentation phase tables 21-31. It is a figure which shows an example of the turning effect production execution tables 1-9. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation effect production execution tables 10-19. It is a figure which shows a pulse data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the state list managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a pushing order alerting | reporting effect determination table. FIG. 11 shows an example of an effect determination table 1. FIG. 11 shows an example of the effect determination table 2. FIG. 11 shows an example of the effect determination table 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table for reset. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a resurrection lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table in Bonus state A. It is a figure which shows an example of a navigation stock addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation stock lottery table for ART game number determination states. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART game number addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the medal acceptance start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the medal management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the rotation effect setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the spinning drum effect process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the rotation direction update process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation phase execution frequency acquisition process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the pulse counter correction process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the excitation image setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the excitation execution frequency confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer waiting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the payout process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT0 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT1 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT2 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT3 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process for RT5 game state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the production content determination process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the reel rotation start reception command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the Bonus preparation state transfer game number reset process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for normal states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for precursor stage in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for self-releasing modes in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus state in ART in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for ART games in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for ART game number determination states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for an ART game number addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the red 7, blue 7, and follow replay display in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the RUSH replay display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the blank display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the task for the various switch detection in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the timing chart which shows transition of RT game state. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing the spinning effect 02-01. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing the spinning effect 02-02. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing the spinning effect 02-03. It is a figure which shows the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of execution of the spinning effect 02-01. It is a figure which shows the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device, when changing from RT2 gaming state to RT3 gaming state.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2, hinge mechanism 2a, front door 3)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. Moreover, the front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a provided on the front left side of the cabinet 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 4)
The keyhole 4 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a special key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work, the change of the set value, etc. are completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Side lamps 5a, 5b)
The side lamps 5a and 5b are provided at the left and right ends of the front door 3 when viewed from the front, and incorporate high-intensity light emitting diodes. Further, the side lamps 5a and 5b are designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Done. The side lamps 5a and 5b may be collectively referred to as “side lamp 5”.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the right side of a cross key 19 to be described later and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(1BET button 7)
The 1BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 23 which will be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the credited medals for the game.

(MAX-BET button 8)
The MAX-BET button 8 is provided on the right side of the 1BET button 7 in front view, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (one game) among the stored medals. It has been. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of usable medals in one game is “3”. The 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 may be collectively referred to as “BET buttons 7, 8”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided below the 1BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of stored medals among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the right side of the settlement button 9 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to detect a start operation that triggers the start of rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. ing. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c described later. Perform the process. Further, the grip ball portion of the start lever 10 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a start lever effect lamp 42 described later is built in the grip ball portion. Then, the after-mentioned effect control board 410 performs lighting / flashing control of the start lever effect lamp 42 on the basis that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player's vision is performed.

(Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13, stop button unit 14)
The left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are provided on the right side of the start lever 10 as viewed from the front, and are unitized by a stop button unit 14. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided to detect a stop operation that triggers the player to stop the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. It has been. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be collectively referred to as “stop buttons 11, 12, 13”.

(Return button 15)
The return button 15 is provided on the right side of the stop button unit 14 when viewed from the front. The return button 15 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 16 described later.

(Selector 16)
The selector 16 is provided inside the medal insertion slot 6 and is provided for determining whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate. The selector 16 is provided with a medal sensor 16s for detecting the passage of an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is an appropriate medal, the appropriate medal is guided to the hopper 520 described later by the hopper guide member 522 described later. To do. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, the medal payout port 33, which will be described later, ejects the medal from the medal payout opening 33, which will be described later.

(Left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, right reel 17c, reel unit 17d)
The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are provided inside the cabinet 2, and each has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. Yes. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotationally driven by exciting stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are unitized by a reel unit 17d, and the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are attached to and detached from the gaming machine 1. Is easy. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c may be collectively referred to as “reel 17”.

(Direction button 18)
The effect button 18 is provided on the right side of the MAX-BET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 18 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the effect button detection switch 18sw detects the operation of the effect button 18. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46 described later is controlled. The sub control board 400 described later displays a menu image or the like via the image control unit 420 of the effect control board 410 described later based on the operation of the effect button 18 detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw. Control.

(Cross key 19)
The cross key 19 is provided on the right side of the effect button 18 when viewed from the front. The cross key 19 can be pressed in at least two directions (normally “4” direction), and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Yes. The cross key 19 is connected to a cross key detection switch 19sw, and a sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the cross key detection switch 19sw detects an operation of the cross key 19. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46 described later is controlled.

(Panel 20)
The panel 20 includes a display window 21, production lamps 22a to 22j, a start lamp 23, BET lamps 24a to 24c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throw-in display unit 28, It comprises a game display lamp 29 and stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c.

(Display window 21)
The display window 21 is provided in the center portion of the panel 20 so as to make the reel 17 visible. Specifically, the pattern drawn on the peripheral surface of the reel 17 is made visible by transmitting the area corresponding to the display window 21 in the panel 20.

(Direction lamps 22a-22j)
The effect lamps 22a to 22j are provided on the back side of the transmissive portions at the left and right ends of the panel 20, and emit light under a predetermined condition to notify the current state (for example, a Bonus state described later). Is provided. More specifically, the effect lamps 22 a to 22 e are provided on the left side of the display window 21 in front view, and the effect lamps 22 f to 22 j are provided on the right side of the display window 21 in front view. The effect lamps 22a to 22j may be collectively referred to as “effect lamp 22”.

(Start lamp 23)
The start lamp 23 is provided above the 1BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation of the start lever 10 can be accepted. Specifically, the main control board 300 (a) when “3” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (b) the number of stored medals is “3” or more, When the number of inserted sheets is “3” due to the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8, (c) when a combination of symbols related to replay described later is displayed on the active line, the start lamp By illuminating 23, control is performed to notify that the start operation by the start lever 10 can be accepted.

(BET lamps 24a-24c)
The BET lamps 24a to 24c are provided on the right side of the start lamp 23 when viewed from the front, and are provided to notify the number of inserted medals used in the game. Specifically, when the number of medals used for the game is “1”, the BET lamp 24a is turned on, and when the number of medals used for the game is “2”, the BET lamp When 24b is lit and the number of medals used in the game is “3”, the BET lamp 24c is lit. The BET lamps 24a to 24c may be collectively referred to as “BET lamp 24”.

(Storage number indicator 25)
The stored number indicator 25 is provided on the right side of the BET lamp 24 when viewed from the front. Further, the stored number display unit 25 is provided for displaying the number of stored medal medals of the player and stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Game state display lamps 26a and 26b)
The game state display lamps 26 a and 26 b are provided on the right side of the stored number display unit 25 in front view. Further, the gaming state display lamps 26a and 26b are notified of the current gaming state by performing light emission control by the main control board 300. The game state display lamps 26a and 26b may be collectively referred to as “game state display lamps 26”.

(Payout number display 27)
The payout number display device 27 is provided on the right side of the game state display lamp 26b in front view. The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols arranged on the activated line activated by operating the BET buttons 7 and 8. . The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a among the three symbols of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c displayed on the display window 21; Only the “downwardly right line” obtained by connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b and the symbol displayed in the lower stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is an effective line. Note that the right-down line may be simply referred to as “down-right”.

  It should be noted that a line connecting the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c is “upper” or “upper line”. May be written. Further, a line connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “middle stage” or “middle stage line”. May be written. In addition, a line connecting the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 17c is a “lower” or “lower line” May be written. Also, a line that connects the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “upward to the right” or “right” It may be described as “rising line”.

(Putable indicator lamp 28)
The insertable display lamp 28 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 27 as viewed from the front. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn on the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 can be stored. On the other hand, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 cannot be stored.

  In this embodiment, since the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”, the main control board 300 described later can be inserted when the number of stored medals is less than “50”. Control to turn on the display lamp 28 is performed, and control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 is performed when the number of stored medals is “50”. In addition, when the combination of symbols related to replay to be described later is displayed on the active line, control is performed to turn off the displayable display lamp 28.

(Replay display lamp 29)
The replay display lamp 29 is provided below the thrown-in display lamp 28. The re-game display lamp 29 is lit when a combination of symbols related to re-game to be described later is displayed on the active line. As a result, a combination of symbols related to “re-game” is displayed on the active line for the player, and the player can perform the next game without using a medal. It is informing that it is.

(Stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c)
The stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c are provided below the display window 21. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 30a is provided below the left reel 17a, the stop operation order display lamp 30b is provided below the middle reel 17b, and the stop operation order display lamp 30c is , Provided below the right reel 17c. In addition, the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c are used to notify the player of the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300 described later. Is provided. Specifically, when it is the optimal timing to stop the left stop button 11, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30a is turned on or blinked, and the intermediate stop button 12 is stopped at the optimal timing. In some cases, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30b is lit or blinked, and when the right stop button 13 is operated to be stopped at an optimal timing, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30c is lit or blinked to optimize the operation. The stop operation order is notified. The stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c may be collectively referred to as “stop operation order display lamp 30” in some cases.

(Lumbar panel 31)
The waist panel 31 is provided below the stop button unit 14 and is provided for allowing the player to recognize a model name, a motif, and the like. Specifically, a picture of an appearing character is drawn. In addition, a light (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the waist panel 31. By emitting the light (not shown), the player can easily recognize the model name, the motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray receiving unit 32)
The tray unit 32 is provided below the waist panel 31 and is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 33 described later.

(Medal payout exit 33)
The medal payout port 33 is provided to discharge medals paid out by the hopper 520 when the hopper 520 described later is driven when paying out medals based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. It has been. Further, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, or when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited. It is provided for discharging medals inserted into the insertion slot 6 to the tray unit 32 via the medal payout opening 33.

  Here, in this embodiment, “when medal insertion acceptance is prohibited” means that (a) the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotating, or (b) a symbol related to replaying. This is when the combination is displayed on the active line.

(Lower speakers 34a, 34b)
The lower speakers 34a and 34b are provided on both the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 33, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, and the like when performing an effect. The lower speakers 34a and 34b may be collectively referred to as “lower speaker 34”.

(Upper speakers 35a, 35b)
The upper speakers 35a and 35b are provided on both the left and right sides of a liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect, similar to the lower speaker 34. . The upper speakers 35a and 35b may be collectively referred to as “upper speaker 35”, and the lower speaker 34 and the upper speaker 35 may be collectively referred to as “speakers 34 and 35”.

(Setting display section 36)
The setting display unit 36 is provided for displaying the current setting value. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a key hole (not shown) and is rotated by a predetermined angle, the main control board 300 displays the currently set value on the setting display unit 36. I do.

(Setting change button 37)
The setting change button 37 is provided for changing the setting value. Here, the method for changing the setting value is as follows. First, as described above, the setting value that is currently set is displayed by rotating a predetermined angle in a state where a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. 36. Next, by operating the setting change button 37, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is switched and displayed. Therefore, the setting change button 37 is pressed until the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Repeat the operation. Then, the start lever 10 is operated while the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Next, an operation of returning the rotated setting change key to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed is performed. By performing these operations, the set value is changed.

  Here, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, no error release button for releasing the error is provided. For this reason, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the main control board 300 performs control to return from the error state based on the fact that a setting change switch 37sw described later detects an operation of the setting change button 37. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 37 has a function for switching the setting value and a function for returning from the error state.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set in six stages from setting “1” to setting “6”, and the setting change is performed when “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. When the button 37 is operated, “2” is displayed on the setting display section 36. Thereafter, every time the setting change button 37 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display section 36 is added and displayed by “1”. The However, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the reel 17 to provide an effect of displaying moving images, still images, and the like. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 46 is provided for notifying information related to the result of an internal lottery process described later, or notifying information necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols related to winning on the active line. It has been. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 46, like the stop operation order display lamp 30, is based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300, which will be described later, and the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. To the player.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the reel 17, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. Details of the main control board 300 will be described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub control board 400 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided for controlling the liquid crystal display device 46 and the speakers 34 and 35. Details of the sub control board 400 will be described later.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of a hopper 520 (described later) in front view, and is provided to supply power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 520)
The hopper 520 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the right side of the power supply device 510 in front view, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Further, the hopper 520 is driven and controlled based on a predetermined signal from a main control board 300 described later. The power supply board 500 described later determines whether or not a predetermined number of medals have been discharged by a medal sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper, and determines that a predetermined number of medals have been discharged. Then, a signal indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out is transmitted to the main control board 300. Thereby, the main control board 300 described later can recognize that the payout of a predetermined number of medals has been completed.

(Discharge slit 521)
The discharge slit 521 is provided in the hopper 520 and is provided to discharge medals from the hopper 520.

(Hopper guide member 522)
The hopper guide member 522 is provided to guide the determined medal to the hopper 520 when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is an appropriate medal. .

(Guide member 523)
The guide member 523 has a foreign object or an appropriate medal when a foreign object is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. It is provided to guide the medal determined to be not to the medal payout exit 33.

(Discharge guide member 524)
The payout guide member 524 is provided to guide the medals discharged from the discharge slit 521 of the hopper 520 to the medal payout outlet 33 side of the tray unit 32.

(Auxiliary storage unit 530)
The auxiliary storage unit 530 is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 520 overflow.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a reel control board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. The main control board 300 is connected to a setting display section 36, a setting change switch 37sw, and an external concentrated terminal board 38.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 reads a program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby causing the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500 to be processed. A predetermined signal is transmitted.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table such as a winning area determination table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol code table (see FIG. 7) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 14) described later, and a winning for RT0 described later. Area determination table (see FIG. 17), RT1 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 18), RT2 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 19), RT3 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 20) RT4 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 21), RT5 winning area determination table described later (see FIG. 22), later-described spinning effect table (see FIG. 23), and later described rotating effect lottery table (see FIG. 21). 24), a later-described effect block table (see FIGS. 25 to 26), a later-described effect phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29), and a later-described spinning effect actual Table (see FIGS. 30 31), described later reel-effect execution table (see FIG. 32), it stores the pulse data table will be described later (see FIG. 33) or the like.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for storing various data determined by execution of programs by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 stores (a) an effect transmission data storage area for transmitting a command to a sub-control board 400, which will be described later, and (b) that replaying is in operation. (C) a re-game in-operation flag storage area, (c) a winning area determining random value storage area for storing a random value extracted by a random number generator 304 described later when performing an internal lottery process described later; A game state storage area for storing a game state, (e) a lottery number storage area for storing the number of lotteries when performing an internal lottery process to be described later, and (f) a stepping motor 101, 102, 103 for reels In a state where the rotation button 17 is rotating, a pressing reference position storage area for storing a pressing reference position acquired when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated. A winning area storage area for storing information related to the selected winning area, (h) a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area for storing that the setting change has been performed illegally, and (i) a set setting value. A setting value storage area for storing, (j) an operable state flag storage area for storing information indicating that the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be operated, and (k) a lamp such as a replay display lamp 29 Lamp-related data storage area for storing whether or not it is lit, (l) medal insertion number counter for storing the number of inserted medals used in the game, and (m) a combination of symbols relating to replay is an effective line A medal that stores a replay medal limit flag or the like that is displayed above and that is not added to the medal insertion number counter value when the medal insertion number counter value is “3”. Field flag storage area, (n) 1 BET button operation enable flag that is ON when operation of 1 BET button 7 is permitted, or MAX-BET that is ON when operation of MAX-BET button 8 is permitted An operation unit acceptance permission flag storage area for storing a button operation enable flag, and (o) requesting a medal to be used in one game based on the detection of an operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8. A medal insertion request counter for storing the requested number of medals, (p) a reel rotation flag storage area for storing a reel rotation flag that is ON when the reel is rotating, (q) A flag data storage area for storing information related to a conditional device to be turned on based on a winning area determined by an internal lottery process to be described later. A display combination storage area for storing a combination of symbols displayed on the effect line, (s) an abnormality detection flag storage area for storing information indicating that an abnormality has been detected, and (t) a stored medal Medal storage number counter for storing the number of coins, (u) medal payout number counter for storing the number of medals to be paid out to the player, and (v) a pull-in prediction for storing the number of retrievals of the expected pull-in reel Based on the reel search count storage area, (w) the pull-in priority storage area for storing the pull-in priority, and (x) the flag data storage area, a combination of symbols allowed to be displayed on the effective line is stored. Display permission symbol storage area for performing, (y) rotation effect storage area for storing the rotation effect to be executed, (z) rotation effect 0 set when executing the rotation effect 02 A lottery game number counter, (aa) a temporary timer value storage area for storing a temporary timer value at the time of executing the spinning effect, and (ab) phase counter data for storing data of the phase counter at the time of executing the spinning effect. A storage area, (ac) a loop counter storage area for storing a loop counter at the time of executing the spinning effect, and the like are provided.

(Random number generator 304)
The random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number for determining a winning area or the like. Here, in the present embodiment, the random number generator 304 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(IF circuit 305)
The I / F (interface) circuit 305 is a circuit for transmitting and receiving signals (commands) between the main control board 300, the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500.

(Setting change switch 37sw)
The setting change switch 37sw is a switch for detecting that the setting change button 37 has been operated. When the setting change button 37 is detected by the setting change switch 37sw in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole and rotated by a predetermined angle, the main CPU 301 displays the setting display. Control to switch and display the set value on the unit 36 is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw in the error state.

(External concentration terminal board 38)
The external concentration terminal board 38 is provided inside the gaming machine 1 and, for a hall computer (not shown), (a) a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, and (b) a player. The medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, (c) the game state transition signal that can specify the transition to the RT3 gaming state, and (d) the rotation start of the reel 17 can be specified. It is provided for outputting a predetermined signal such as a reel rotation start signal.

(Relay board 200)
The relay board 200 includes a 1BET switch 7sw, a MAX-BET switch 8sw, a checkout switch 9sw, a start switch 10sw, a left stop switch 11sw, a middle stop switch 12sw, a right stop switch 13sw, a medal sensor 16s, a start lamp 23, and a BET lamp 24. The stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the insertion possible display lamp 28, the re-game display lamp 29, the selector sensor 39s, the reset key sensor 40s, and the door opening sensor 41s are connected.

(1BET switch 7sw)
The 1BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use “1” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(MAX-BET switch 8sw)
The MAX-BET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player. Further, when the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. . Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use “3” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The 1 BET switch 7sw and the MAX-BET switch 8sw may be collectively referred to as “BET switches 7sw, 8sw”.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9 by the player. Further, when an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating that the stored medal is to be returned to the power supply board 500 based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. And the power supply board 500 performs control which returns the medal currently stored by the hopper 520. FIG.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. Further, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for starting the rotation of the reel 17 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11 by the player. When the operation of the left stop button 11 by the player is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating left reel 17a based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player. Further, when the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating middle reel 17b based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player. Further, when the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating right reel 17c based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw may be collectively referred to as “stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw”.

  In the present embodiment, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are provided so that the ON / OFF of the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be detected. Therefore, when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated by the player (ON edge), and after the player operates the stop button 11, 12, 13, the player's finger is moved to the stop button 11, 12, 13 (OFF edge) is provided so as to be detected.

(Medal sensor 16s)
The medal sensor 16s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, when the medal sensor 16s detects a normal medal passage, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when a medal is inserted based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Selector sensor 39s)
The selector sensor 39s is a sensor for detecting fraud. Further, when an illegal act is detected by the selector sensor 39 s, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when an illegal act is detected based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Reset key sensor 40s)
The reset key sensor 40s is a sensor for detecting that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction. When the reset key sensor 40s detects that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction, the relay board 200 is connected to the I of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is transmitted to the / F circuit 305. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Door open sensor 41s)
The door opening sensor 41 s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 4 and is a sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 3. In the present embodiment, the door opening sensor 41s includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. When a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and the dedicated key is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening sensor 41s is illustrated. The locking portion that does not rotate will rotate. And when the said locking part rotates, the light light-emitted from the light emission part does not reach a light-receiving part. Thus, the door opening sensor 41s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Power supply board 500)
A power supply device 510, a hopper 520, and an auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s are connected to the power supply substrate 500.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 includes a power button 511 and a power switch 511sw.

(Power button 511)
The power button 511 is provided for a store clerk or the like of the game store to perform an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power button 511 is connected to a power switch 511sw.

(Power switch 511sw)
The power switch 511sw is a switch for detecting that the power button 511 is operated. Further, power is supplied to the entire gaming machine 1 based on the detection of the operation of the power button 511 by the power switch 511sw.

(Auxiliary storage part full tank sensor 530s)
The auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530 s is a sensor for detecting that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530. When the auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530 s detects that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530, the power supply board 500 is connected to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is output. Then, when the main control board 300 receives a predetermined signal, control is performed to make an error state.

(Reel control board 100)
Stepping motors 101, 102, 103, a left reel sensor 111s, a middle reel sensor 112s, and a right reel sensor 113s are connected to the reel control board 100.

(Stepping motors 101, 102, 103)
Stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are provided for rotationally driving the reel 17. Further, the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 have a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. Then, the driving force of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 is transmitted to the reel 17 through a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. As a result, the reel 17 rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. The main CPU 301 manages the rotation angle of the reel 17 by counting the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 111s)
The left reel sensor 111s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the left reel 17a has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

(Medium reel sensor 112s)
The middle reel sensor 112s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the middle reel 17b has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

(Right reel sensor 113s)
The right reel sensor 113s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the right reel 17c has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The left reel sensor 111s, the middle reel sensor 112s, and the right reel sensor 113s may be collectively referred to as “reel sensors 111s, 112s, 113s”.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is a board mainly for controlling effects. The sub control board 400 includes an I / F (interface) circuit 401, a sub CPU 402, a random number generator 403, a sub ROM 404, a sub RAM 405, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) device 406. Further, the effect button detection switch 18sw, the cross key detection switch 19sw, the effect control board 410, and the amplifier control board 440 are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Production button detection switch 18sw)
The effect button detection switch 18sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the effect button 18 by the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, the sub control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the effect button 18 by the player.

(Cross key detection switch 19sw)
The cross key detection switch 19sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the cross key 19 by the player. When the operation of the cross key 19 by the player is detected by the cross key detection switch 19sw, the sub-control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the cross key 19 by the player.

(I / F circuit 401)
An I / F (interface) circuit 401 is provided to receive a signal from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300.

(Sub CPU 402)
The sub CPU 402 reads an effect program stored in the sub ROM 404 and performs a predetermined calculation based on a command from the main control board 300, an input signal of the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the cross key detection switch 19sw. The calculation result is provided to supply the effect control board 410 and the amplifier control board 440.

(Random number generator 403)
The random number generator 403 is provided to generate a random number used when determining an effect or the like performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, the speakers 34, 35, and the like. The random number generator 403 is provided to generate a random number for determining the number of games to be added to the number of games in the ART state described later or the number of games in the ART state described later.

(Sub ROM 404)
The sub ROM 404 stores a program for executing the effect. Specifically, a push order notification effect determination table described later (see FIG. 35), an effect determination table described later (see FIGS. 36 to 38), a Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table described later (see FIG. 39), and later described. Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 40), a Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) described later, a promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42) described later, and an ART in the Bonus state B described later. A lottery table (see FIG. 43), a later-described navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 44), a Bonus state A ART lottery table (see FIG. 45), a later-described extra game number determination table (see FIG. 46), and a later-described ART stock number determination state navigation stock lottery table (see FIG. 47), ART game number additional lottery table (see FIG. 4) Reference), in a normal state described later, a self-releasing mode lottery table (not shown) used when drawing whether or not to shift to a self-releasing mode described later, a pullback state A described later, and a pullback described later In state B, it is provided to store a return lottery table (not shown) or the like used when determining whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state or ART state. The sub ROM 404 is mainly composed of a program storage area and a table storage area.

(Sub RAM 405)
The sub RAM 405 functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 402 performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, there are provided a storage area for storing various data such as a winning area transmitted from the main control board 300, and a storage area for storing the determined contents and effects data. Specifically, in the sub RAM 405, (a) a state number storage area for storing a state managed by the sub control board 400, and (b) an ART for storing the number of games that can be played in the ART state described later. (C) Bonus for storing the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state in the normal state described later, and the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state during ART in the later-described ART game. When the winning areas “04” to “06” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ready state transition game number counter, (d) the ART game number determination state described later, or the ART game number added state, the BAR replay The stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 for displaying the combination of symbols on the active line is notified. A navigation stock storage area for storing the number of navigation stocks, (e) a bonus game number counter for storing the number of games that can be played in the bonus state A to the bonus state C, and (f) a bonus ready state game number. Bonus ready state transition game number reset flag storage area for storing information indicating that the reset operation has been performed, (g) The number of games to be played in the precursor stage A described later or the precursor stage B described later A pre-game number counter for storing, (h) a self-release mode game number counter for storing the number of games to be played in a self-release mode described later, and (i) for storing information relating to the selected menu. (J) for storing information for transmitting a command to the effect control board 410 Performance control board transmission data storage area and the like.

  In addition, in the normal state described later, apart from the bonus preparation state transition game number counter for storing the number of games for shifting to the bonus preparation state, in the ART state described later, for shifting to the bonus preparation state during ART. There may be provided an ART Bonus preparation state transition game number counter for storing the number of games.

(RTC device 406)
The RTC device 406 is provided for counting a predetermined counter value at a counting interval different from a count value counted by a frame counter 425 described later. The RTC device 406 is provided for acquiring the current date and time.

(Production control board 410)
The effect control board 410 is a board mainly for executing effects. The effect control board 410 includes an image control unit 420 and a lamp control unit 430.

(Image control unit 420)
The image control unit 420 is provided to control the display of the liquid crystal display device 46 mainly when performing an effect. The image control unit 420 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 421, a liquid crystal control CPU 422, a liquid crystal control ROM 423, a liquid crystal control RAM 424, a frame counter 425, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 426, a VRAM 427, a sound source IC 428, and a sound source ROM 428. Have. Further, the general-purpose board 45 and the lamp control unit 430 are connected to the image control unit 420.

(General purpose board 45)
The general-purpose substrate 45 is provided between the image control unit 420 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and has a bridge function for converting the image data into a predetermined image format when displaying the image data. Further, the general-purpose board 45 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the liquid crystal display device 46 for displaying image data. For example, a difference in resolution between when an SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) 19-inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected and when an XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected Absorbs.

(VDP421)
The VDP 421 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 422. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated and output to the general-purpose substrate 45, thereby performing control of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46. The VDP 421 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus I / F, a CPU I / F, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus. .

(Liquid crystal control CPU 422)
The liquid crystal control CPU 422 is provided for creating a display list based on the command received from the sub control board 400 and transmitting the display list to the VDP 421. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs control to display the image data stored in the CGROM 426 on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 423)
The liquid crystal control ROM 423 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 422, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored. The animation pattern referred to here is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores a combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 424)
The liquid crystal control RAM 424 is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 422. The liquid crystal control RAM 424 also functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 423.

(Frame counter 425)
The frame counter 425 is provided to receive a power supply from the power supply board 500 and count the frame counter value. The frame counter 425 stops counting the frame counter value when the supply of power from the power supply board 500 is stopped. Then, when the supply of power by the power supply substrate 500 is resumed, the frame counter 425 initializes the frame counter value registered in the register and resumes counting.

(CGROM426)
The CGROM 426 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), an EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a mask ROM, and the like. Further, the CGROM 426 compresses and stores image data (for example, sprites, movies) and the like that are a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). This pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 426 performs reading in units of image data by the VDP 421 and performs image processing in units of frame image data. Further, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.

  In this embodiment, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Not limited to this, a configuration in which only a part is compressed may be used. As a movie compression method, various compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

(VRAM427)
The VRAM 427 is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). Here, “SRAM” is a readable / writable memory, and is a kind of volatile memory for temporarily holding data. By configuring the VRAM 427 with SRAM, writing and reading of image data can be processed at high speed. The VRAM 427 is configured by a memory map including an arbitrary area, a display list area 1, a display list area 2, a frame buffer area 1, and a frame buffer area 2.

(Sound source IC428)
The sound source IC 428 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound from the sound source ROM 429 and generating sound signals for driving the speakers 34 and 35.

(Sound source ROM 429)
The sound source ROM 429 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, programs and data related to voice are stored.

(Ramp control unit 430)
The lamp control unit 430 is a board for controlling the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 mainly when performing an effect. The lamp control unit 430 includes a lamp control CPU 431, a lamp control ROM 432, and a lamp control RAM 433. In addition, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the start lever effect lamp 42, and the drive board 43 are connected to the lamp control unit 430.

(Start lever effect lamp 42)
The start lever effect lamp 42 is composed of a high-intensity light-emitting diode, and is provided to perform an effect visually appealing to the player based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the lamp control unit 430 controls lighting / flashing of the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition such as a case where a predetermined winning area is won is satisfied in an internal lottery process described later. I do.

(Drive board 43)
The drive substrate 43 is a substrate for performing control to move the effect device 44. Further, the drive board 43 performs control for moving the effect device 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the lamp control unit 430.

(Directing device 44)
The effect device 44 is provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, the lamp control unit 430 performs control to move the rendering device 44 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive substrate 43 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the sub control substrate 400. Thus, a visual appeal to the player is performed.

(Lamp control CPU 431)
The lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data relating to light emission of the lamp and LED stored in the lamp control ROM 432, and emits the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. Is provided for generating a signal. In addition, the lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data stored in the lamp control ROM 432, generates a signal for performing control to move the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and transmits the signal to the drive board 43. Is provided.

(Lamp control ROM 432)
The lamp control ROM 432 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, the lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like relating to light emission of the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. The lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like for moving the rendering device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive board 43.

(Ramp control RAM 433)
The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 are controlled to emit light. The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are moved via the drive board 43.

(Amplifier control board 440)
The amplifier control board 440 is a board for outputting audio data mainly from the speakers 34 and 35. The amplifier control board 440 is connected to a lower speaker amplifier 441 and an upper speaker amplifier 442.

(Lower speaker amplifier 441)
The lower speaker amplifier 441 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output it to the lower speaker 34.

(Upper speaker amplifier 442)
The upper speaker amplifier 442 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output the amplified audio signal to the upper speaker 35.

(Internal structure of stepping motor)
Next, the internal structure of the stepping motor will be described with reference to FIG.

  Inside each of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, the A phase to D phase, which are the respective excitation phases, are arranged in order in a clockwise direction at intervals of approximately 90 °. A rotor is provided at the center of the A phase to the D phase. The main control board 300 performs control to output a pulse signal to the reel control board 100 based on a pulse data table (see FIG. 32) described later stored in the main ROM 302. The reel control board 100 Based on the pulse signal from the main control board 300, an excitation signal is output for each of the excitation phases A to D, so that the rotor rotates in a predetermined direction, and the reel 17 has the same direction as the rotor. Will rotate.

(Design arrangement table)
Next, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol arrangement table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the main CPU 301 detects the reel index, the symbol position in the middle of the display window 21 is defined as “00”. Further, “00” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are assigned to the symbols in the order of the reel rotation direction with reference to the symbol position “00”.

(Design code table)
Next, the symbol code table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol code table stores symbol codes corresponding to symbols arranged on the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c, and data corresponding to the symbols. Here, in the present embodiment, when the symbol code is “01”, “00000001” is stored as data corresponding to the symbol “red 7” as data. Similarly, data corresponding to each symbol is stored for symbol codes “02” to “10”.

  Further, the type of the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified based on the symbol counter value (“00” to “20”), the symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 6), and the symbol code table. Can do. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it may be specified that the symbol “watermelon” at the symbol position “00” is displayed in the middle of the display window 21. it can. Similarly, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it is specified that the symbol “Replay 1” at the symbol position “01” is displayed in the upper part of the display window 21. It is possible to specify that the symbol “Bell 1” at the symbol position “20” is displayed in the lower part of the display window 21. When the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified, the main CPU 301 stores “00000101” as data in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303.

  The data stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303 can be set as appropriate according to the effective line. For example, as in the present embodiment, when the effective line is a lower right line, “Replay 1” is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a, and therefore “00000101” is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303. It may be memorized. In this case, data relating to symbols displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b and the lower stage of the right reel 17c is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 303.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, FIG. 8 is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, and FIG. 10 is a symbol combination table. 11 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose group is “03”, FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”, and FIG. 12 is a symbol combination whose symbol combination group is “05”. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “06”, and FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “07”. These may be collectively referred to as a “symbol combination table”.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and defines a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination, and a payout number. In the symbol combination table, symbol names corresponding to symbol groups and symbol bits are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the medals are paid out and replayed when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. Control is performed to give a player a privilege such as operation or operation of a bonus game. For example, when the symbol combination “Bell 1”, “Replay 1”, and “BAR1” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay 01”. It is determined that Note that if the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, it is “lost”.

  Here, the “payout number” refers to the number of medals to be paid out to the player, and when a combination of symbols in which a numerical value of “1” or more is defined as the payout number is displayed on the active line. The medal is paid out. Here, in this embodiment, “push order bells A1 to A4”, “push order bells B1-01 to 02”, “push order bells B2-01 to 02”, and “push order bells B3-01 to 02”. , “Push order bell B4-01-02”, “push order bell C1-C8”, “correct answer bell 01-12”, “middle stage watermelon 01-02”, “upper stage watermelon 01-02”, “upward rightward watermelon 01” ~ 03 "," Right Down Watermelon "," Cherry 01-01-06 "," Cherry 02-01-15 ", and" Special Role 01-03 "are displayed on the active line. Based on this, medals are paid out.

  Note that “push order bells A1 to A4”, “push order bells B1-01-02”, “push order bells B2-01-02”, “push order bells B3-01-02”, “push order bells B4- "01-02", "push order bell C1-C8", "correct answer bell 01-12", "middle watermelon 01-02", "upper watermelon 01-02", "right-up watermelon 01-03", "lower-right" A combination of symbols relating to “watermelon”, “cherry 01-01 to 06”, “cherry 02-01 to 15”, and “special role 01 to 03” is collectively referred to as “a combination of symbols relating to winning”. There is.

  In addition, “push order bell A1 to A4”, “push order bell B1-01-02”, “push order bell B2-01-02”, “push order bell B3-01-02”, “push order bell B4- “01 to 02” and “push order bells C1 to C8” may be collectively referred to simply as “push order bells”. In addition, “correct answer bells 01 to 12” may be collectively referred to simply as “correct answer bell”. In addition, “push order bell A1 to A4”, “push order bell B1-01-02”, “push order bell B2-01-02”, “push order bell B3-01-02”, “push order bell B4- “01 to 02”, “push order bells C1 to C8”, and “correct answer bells 01 to 12” may be collectively referred to as “bell” in some cases. In addition, “middle watermelon 01-02”, “upper watermelon 01-02”, “right-up watermelon 01-03” and “right-down watermelon” may be collectively referred to simply as “watermelon”. In addition, “cherry 01-01 to 06” and “cherry 02-01 to 15” may be collectively referred to simply as “cherry”. Further, “special roles 01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “special roles”.

  In this embodiment, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, “downward right replay 01 to 04”, “ "Preparation Replay 01-04", "RT4 Transition Replay 01-08", "Follow Replay 01-04", "Red 7 Replay 01-01-04", "Red 7 Replay 02-01-04", "Red 7 Replay 03-01 to 08 "," Red 7 Replay 04-01 to 08 "," Blue 7 Replay 01 to 06 "," BAR Replay 01 "," BAR Replay 02 "," BAR Replay 03-01 to 03 "," "RUSH replay 01-01-04", "RUSH replay 02-01-04", "RUSH replay 03-01-06", "RUSH replay 04-01-02" When a combination of symbols relating to the "RUSH replay 05-01～04" is displayed on the pay line is the replay operation is performed.

  Note that “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, “downward right replay 01 to 04”, and “preparation replay 01 to 04”. "RT4 transition replay 01-08", "Follow replay 01-04", "Red 7 replay 01-01-04", "Red 7 replay 02-01-04", "Red 7 replay 03-01-08" ”,“ Red 7 Replay 04-01-08 ”,“ Blue 7 Replay 01-06 ”,“ BAR Replay 01 ”,“ BAR Replay 02 ”,“ BAR Replay 03-01-03 ”,“ RUSH Replay 01-01 ” -04 "," RUSH replay 02-01-04 "," RUSH replay 03-01-06 "," RUSH replay 04-01-02 "," RUSH replay 5-01～04 "are collectively referred to, there is a case to be described as the" replay "or" replay ".

  Further, “middle stage replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “middle stage replays”. In addition, “upper replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “upper replay”. Further, “lower replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “lower replays”. Also, “upward replays 01 to 09” may be collectively referred to simply as “upward replays”. In addition, “right-down replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to as “right-down replay” in some cases. Further, “preparation replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “preparation replays”. Further, “RT4 transition replay 01 to 08” may be collectively referred to simply as “RT4 transition replay”. Further, “follow replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “follow replays”. Also, “Red 7 Replay 01-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 02-01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 03-01-08” and “Red 7 Replay 04-01-08” are collectively referred to as Sometimes simply described as “Red 7 Replay”. Further, “blue 7 replay 01 to 06” may be collectively referred to simply as “blue 7 replay”. Further, “BAR replay 01”, “BAR replay 02”, and “BAR replay 03-01 to 03” may be collectively referred to simply as “BAR replay”. Also, “RUSH replay 01-01-04”, “RUSH replay 02-01-04”, “RUSH replay 03-01-06”, “RUSH replay 04-01-02” and “RUSH replay 05-01-04”. "May be collectively referred to as" RUSH replay ". Further, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, and “downward right replay 01 to 04” are collectively referred to as “normal”. "Replay" may be described.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”)
As shown in FIG. 8, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” includes “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, and “upward replay 01 to 09”. ”,“ Right downward replay 01-04 ”,“ Preparation replay 01-04 ”, and“ RT4 transition replay 01-08 ”, the bit corresponding to this symbol combination, and each bit Designated for design bit names.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” defines a symbol combination related to “middle stage replays 01 to 04”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”)
As shown in FIG. 9, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” includes “follow replay 01 to 04”, “red 7 replay 01-01 to 04”, “red 7 replay 02-01 to 04”, “ A combination of symbols relating to “Red 7 Replay 03-01 to 08”, “Red 7 Replay 04-01 to 08”, “Blue 7 Replay 01 to 06”, “BAR Replay 01” and “BAR Replay 02”, and this symbol The bit corresponding to the combination and the symbol bit name corresponding to each bit are defined.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” defines the symbol combinations related to “follow replays 01 to 04”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”)
As shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” includes “BAR replay 03-01-03”, “RUSH replay 01-01-08”, “RUSH replay 02-01-04”, “ Combinations of symbols related to “RUSH replay 03-01 to 06”, “RUSH replay 04-01 to 02”, and “RUSH replay 05-01 to 04”, bits corresponding to this symbol combination, and corresponding to each bit The design bit name is specified.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” defines a symbol combination related to “BAR replay 03-01 to 03”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”)
As shown in FIG. 11, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” includes “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order”. "Bell B1-01-02", "Push Order Bell B2-01-02", "Push Order Bell B3-01-02" and "Push Order Bell B4-01-02" The bit corresponding to the combination and the symbol bit name corresponding to each bit are defined.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” defines a symbol combination related to “push order bell A1”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “05”)
As shown in FIG. 12, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “05” includes “push order bell C1”, “push order bell C2”, “push order bell C3”, “push order bell C4”, “push order”. “Bell C5”, “Push Order Bell C6”, “Push Order Bell C7” and “Push Order Bell C8”, the bit corresponding to this symbol combination, and the symbol bit name corresponding to each bit It is prescribed.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “05” defines a symbol combination related to “push order bell C1”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “06”)
As shown in FIG. 13, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “06” is “correct answer bell 01-12”, “middle watermelon 01-02”, “upper watermelon 01-02”, “right-up watermelon 01-03”. ”,“ Right Down Watermelon ”,“ Cherry 01-01-06 ”,“ Cherry 02-01-15 ”and“ Special Role 01 ”, the bit corresponding to this symbol combination, and each bit The symbol bit name corresponding to is defined.

  For example, “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “06” defines a symbol combination related to “correct answer bells 01 to 12”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “07”)
As shown in FIG. 14, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “07” includes “special role 02”, “special role 03”, “blank 01-01-08”, “blank 02-01-02”, “ A combination of symbols related to “Blank 03-01 to 08”, “Blank 04-01 to 08”, “Blank 05-01 to 12” and “Blank 06-01 to 08”, and a bit corresponding to the combination of these symbols The symbol bit name corresponding to each bit is defined.

  For example, in the “bit 0 (00000001)” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “07”, a symbol combination related to “special role 02” is defined.

  "Blank 01-01 to 08", "Blank 02-01 to 02", "Blank 03-01 to 08", "Blank 04-01 to 08", "Blank 05-01 to 12" and "Blank 06" −01 to 08 ”may be collectively referred to simply as“ blank ”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, based on FIG. 15, a gaming state transition diagram will be described.

  The gaming state transition diagram defines the current gaming state, the conditions for transitioning the RT gaming state, and the gaming state of the transition destination. Here, in the present embodiment, when the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays that one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Based on the above, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301, based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, Control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “Blue 7 Replay” or “Follow Replay” on the active line. Based on this, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 selects one of the combinations of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay”, “Blue 7 Replay”, or “Follow Replay” on the active line. Based on the display of the combination of symbols, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  Also, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT5 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” on the active line in the RT2 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT3 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line in the RT3 gaming state. Control to shift to the RT4 gaming state is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT5 based on the fact that any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line in the RT3 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT4 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Further, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT4 gaming state to the RT5 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” on the active line in the RT4 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT5 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT5 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the display of one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  Also, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT5 gaming state to the RT2 based on the display of any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” on the active line in the RT5 gaming state. Control to shift to the gaming state.

(Relationship between winning area, stop button operation sequence, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 16, the relationship between the winning area, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 16, the winning area, the contents corresponding to each winning area, the condition device that is activated when each winning area is determined, whether or not to be determined in each gaming state, and the stop operation sequence The relationship with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the active line is defined.

  RT0 winning area determination table, RT1 winning area determination table, RT2 winning area determination table, RT3 winning area determination table, RT4 winning area determination table, and RT5 winning area determination, which will be described later, stored in the main ROM 302. In the table, winning areas of “00” to “36” are defined, but not all winning areas can be determined in all gaming states.

  For example, in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the “losing” of the winning area “00” may be determined, while in the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state, There is no possibility of determining “losing” of “00”. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility of determining the “Bonus rush replay 01” in the winning area “01”, while in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state, There is no possibility of determining “Bonus rush replay 01” in the winning area “01”.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 16, the condition apparatus which will operate | move differs with the determined winning area. For example, when the winning area “12” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, a condition device related to “middle replay”, “upper replay”, “lower replay”, “right-up replay”, and “right-down replay” Will be activated. That is, when the winning area “12” is determined, combinations of symbols related to “middle replay”, “upper replay”, “lower replay”, “upward right replay”, and “downward right replay” are on the active line. Can be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, winning areas having different combinations of symbols arranged on the effective line are provided depending on the stop operation order by the player. Specifically, through the internal lottery process described later, “Bonus rush replay 01-03”, “Blue 7 complete replay”, “RT4 BAR complete replay 01-03”, “Preparation replay 01-04”, “RT3 during Single BAR match replay 01-03, “RT3 double BAR match replay 01-03”, “state transition replay”, “push order bell A1-A4”, “push order bell B1-B4” are determined as winning areas In such a case, the combination of symbols arranged on the active line differs depending on the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player. For example, when “Bonus rush replay 03” in the winning area “03” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated at the same symbol position, 11 and when the middle stop button 12 is first operated, different symbol combinations are displayed on the active line.

  On the other hand, when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, there is a winning area where the combination of symbols aligned on the active line is different regardless of the stop operation sequence by the player. Is provided. Specifically, through the internal lottery process described later, “Lose”, “Normal Replay”, “Common Bell”, “Weak Watermelon”, “Strong Watermelon”, “Weak Cherry”, “Strong Cherry”, “Weak Chance” ”,“ Medium chance eyes ”, and“ strong chance eyes ”are determined as winning areas, no matter what order the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated by the player, The combinations of symbols that are aligned are the same. However, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to winning may not be displayed on the active line.

  Note that the RT0 gaming state may be described as “non-RT gaming state” or “general gaming state”. The RT1 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are collectively referred to as “ It may be described as “RT gaming state”.

(Winning area determination table)
Next, the winning area determination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT0, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT1, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT2. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT3, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT4, and FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT5. . These may be collectively referred to as “winning area determination table”.

  The winning area determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for each gaming state. Here, in the present embodiment, a winning area determination table for RT0, a winning area determination table for RT1, a winning area determination table for RT2, a winning area determination table for RT3, a winning area determination table for RT4, and a winning area determination table for RT5. Is provided.

  In the winning area determination table, lottery values are defined for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, a winning area determination table for RT0, a winning area determination table for RT1, a winning area determination table for RT2, a winning area determination table for RT3, a winning area determination table for RT4, and a winning area determination for RT5 In the table, lottery values of setting “1” to setting “6” are defined.

(RT0 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 17, the winning area determination table for RT0 is the winning area “losing”, “normal replay”, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell”. "A4", "push order bell B1", "push order bell B2", "push order bell B3", "push order bell B4", "common bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "weak cherry" The lottery values are defined for “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance”, and “strong chance”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT0 gaming state, “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 BAR matching replay 01”, “BAR replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR replay 03 during RT4”, “Blue 7 replay”, “preparation replay 01” “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”, “RT3 Middle Single BAR Match Replay 01, RT3 Single BAR Match Replay 02, RT3 Single BAR Match Replay 03, RT3 Double BAR Match Replay 01, RT3 Double BAR Match Replay 02, RT3 "Replay 03 with medium double BAR" and "Replay for status transition" Without being determined as the area.

  In the RT0 winning area determination table, a lottery value is defined for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, lottery values are defined for the settings “1” to “6”, respectively, but in FIG. 17, illustration of the lottery values for the settings “2” to “5” is omitted. doing.

  Here, when the lottery values defined in the RT0 winning area determination table for the setting “1” and the setting “6” are compared, the setting “6” is the winning when compared with the setting “1”. The probability that “00” is determined as an area is defined low. In other words, setting “6” has a lower probability of becoming “losing” than setting “1” and has a higher probability of determining any winning area other than “losing”. Therefore, it can be said that the setting “6” is a setting value advantageous to the player compared with the setting “1”.

  For the settings “2” to “5”, the higher the set value, the lower the probability that “00” will be determined as the winning area. That is, the higher the setting value, the more advantageous the setting value for the player.

(RT1 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 17, the winning area determination table for RT1 is the winning area “losing”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “preparation replay 01”, “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”. , “Push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “Push order bell B4”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance”, and “strong chance” The lottery value is defined in In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT1 gaming state, “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 BAR matching replay 01”, "RT4 BAR-matched replay 02", "RT4 BAR-matched replay 03", "Normal replay", "RT3 single BAR-matched replay 01", "RT3 single BAR-matched replay 02", "RT3 single BAR-matched replay "03", "Double BAR match replay 01 during RT3", "Double BAR match replay 02 during RT3", "Double BAR match replay 03 during RT3", and "Status transition replay" are not determined as winning areas. .

  In the RT1 winning area determination table, a lottery value is defined for each set value as in the RT0 winning area determination table, but the drawing of the lottery values of the settings “2” to “5” is omitted. doing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state have a probability that “losing” is determined as the winning area compared to the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state. Since it is high, it can be said that it is a relatively unfavorable gaming state for the player.

(RT2 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 19, the winning area determination table for RT2 is the winning areas “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”. , “Push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “common bell”, “weak” Lottery values are defined for “watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance”, and “strong chance”. In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT2 gaming state, “lost”, “BAR-matched replay 01 during RT4”, “BAR-matched replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR-matched replay 03 during RT4” , “Blue 7 complete replay”, “Preparation replay 01”, “Preparation replay 02”, “Preparation replay 03”, “Preparation replay 04”, “Normal replay”, “RT3 single BAR uniform replay 01”, “RT3 during "Single BAR Match Replay 02", "RT3 Single BAR Match Replay 03", "RT3 Double BAR Match Replay 01", "RT3 Double BAR Match Replay 02", "RT3 Double BAR Match Replay 03", and "Status" “Transition Replay” is not determined as the winning area.

  Similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table and the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value, and the setting “2” to the setting “5”. Illustration of the lottery value is omitted.

(RT3 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 20, the winning area determination table for RT3 is the winning area “normal replay”, “single BAR matching replay 01 during RT3”, “single BAR matching replay 02 during RT3”, and “single BAR matching replay 03 during RT3”. , “Double BAR match replay 01 during RT3”, “Double BAR match replay 02 during RT3”, “Double BAR match replay 03 during RT3”, “Replay for state transition”, “Push order bell A1”, “Push order bell A2” ”,“ Push order bell A3 ”,“ push order bell A4 ”,“ push order bell B1 ”,“ push order bell B2 ”,“ push order bell B3 ”,“ push order bell B4 ”,“ common bell ”,“ Lottery values are specified for "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak chance", "medium chance", and "strong chance" It has been. In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT3 gaming state, “losing”, “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, “RT4 BAR aligned” “Replay 01”, “BAR Replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR Replay 03 During RT4”, “Blue 7 Replay”, “Preparation Replay 01”, “Preparation Replay 02”, “Preparation Replay 03”, and “Preparation” “Replay 04” is not determined as the winning area.

  Similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, and the RT2 winning area determination table, the RT3 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value. The drawing of the lottery values of the setting “2” to the setting “5” is omitted.

(RT4 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 21, the winning area determination table for RT4 includes the winning areas “BAR replay 01 during RT4”, “BAR replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR replay 03 during RT4”, “push order bell A1”, “Push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, “push order bell B4”, “ Lottery values are stipulated for "common bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak chance", "medium chance", and "strong chance" . In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT4 gaming state, “losing”, “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, “blue 7 all-match replay”. ”,“ Preparation Replay 01 ”,“ Preparation Replay 02 ”,“ Preparation Replay 03 ”,“ Preparation Replay 04 ”,“ Normal Replay ”,“ RT3 Single BAR Match Replay 01 ”,“ RT3 Single BAR Match Replay 02 ” "RT3 single BAR match replay 03", "RT3 double BAR match replay 01", "RT3 double BAR match replay 02", "RT3 double BAR match replay 03", and "status transition replay" It is never determined as an area.

  In addition, the RT4 winning area determination table defines a lottery value for each set value, similarly to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, and the RT3 winning area determination table. The drawing of the lottery values of the setting “2” to the setting “5” is omitted.

(RT5 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 22, the winning area determination table for RT5 is the winning area “preparation replay 01”, “preparation replay 02”, “preparation replay 03”, “preparation replay 04”, “normal replay”, “push order bell A1. ”,“ Push order bell A2 ”,“ push order bell A3 ”,“ push order bell A4 ”,“ push order bell B1 ”,“ push order bell B2 ”,“ push order bell B3 ”,“ push order bell B4 ” , "Common Bell", "Weak Watermelon", "Strong Watermelon", "Weak Cherry", "Strong Cherry", "Weak Chance", "Medium Chance", and "Strong Chance" are specified. ing. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT4 gaming state, “losing”, “Bonus rush replay 01”, “Bonus rush replay 02”, “Bonus rush replay 03”, and “BAR during RT4” are aligned. “Replay 01”, “BAR Aligned Replay 02 during RT4”, “BAR Aligned Replay 03 During RT4”, “Blue 7 Aligned Replay”, “Single BAR Matched Replay 01 During RT3”, “Single BAR Matched Replay 02 During RT3”, “ RT3 single BAR match replay 03, “RT3 double BAR match replay 01”, “RT3 double BAR match replay 02”, “RT3 double BAR match replay 03”, and “status transition replay” are the winning areas. There is no decision.

  The RT5 winning area determination table is a set value similar to the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, the RT3 winning area determination table, and the RT4 winning area determination table. A lottery value is defined for each, and illustration of the lottery values of setting “2” to setting “5” is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the RT2 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state have a lower probability that “losing” is determined as the winning area compared to the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. This is a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player.

(Cylinder production table)
Next, based on FIG. 23, the spinning drum production table will be described.

  The rotation effect table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is defined for the winning area and the rotating effect 01 to the rotating effect 04 corresponding to the winning area. Each of the spinning effects of the spinning effect 01 to the rotating effect 04 is defined as to whether or not to execute the spinning effect for each winning area. For example, when the winning area is “07”, “rotation effect 01” can be executed.

  Here, the “rotating effect” means that the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotated in the reverse direction, the rotational speed is accelerated or decelerated, and a special symbol combination (for example, the display window 21). As an aspect of the combination of symbols displayed on the screen, it means an effect performed by stopping at a combination of symbols in which the symbols related to “BAR2” are displayed in a straight line). Here, in this embodiment, the operation of the start lever 10 for starting the operation of the 1BET button 7, the operation of the MAX-BET button 8, the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c is performed. In addition, a process in which a process based on the operation for a predetermined time (for example, a process of starting rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c) is not performed is also included in the spinning effect.

  However, in this case, the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 necessary for the spinning effect is not the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 for using the medals necessary for the game. The operation of is not invalidated. Further, not the operation of the start lever 10 for rotating the reel 17 at the start of the game, but the operation of the start lever necessary for the spinning effect is not invalidated. For example, when the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10, the reel rotation is reversed, the rotation speed is increased or decreased, and a special symbol combination (for example, displayed on the display window 21). As a combination mode of the symbols to be displayed, it is possible to temporarily stop the symbol according to “BAR2” by a combination of symbols displayed in a straight line).

(Cylinder effect 01)
“Rotation effect 01” is a rotation effect that can be performed when the winning area is “07”. In other words, this is a spinning effect that can be performed when “blue 7 uniform replay” is determined as the winning area. Here, as described above, “blue 7 uniform replay” is a winning area that can be determined only in the RT1 gaming state. Therefore, it can be said that the turning effect 01 is a turning effect that can be executed in the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning area “07” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the main CPU 301 determines the “rotation effect 01 based on the rotor effect 01 lottery effect lottery table to be described later. To determine whether or not to execute. Then, when it is decided to execute the “rotation effect 01”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 for using the medals necessary for the game, the operation of the MAX-BET button 8, Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start rotation of the reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, processing based on the operation is not performed.

  In addition, when the winning area “07” is determined, even if weight is given to the privilege to be given to the player depending on whether the “rotation effect 01” is executed or the “rotation effect 01” is not executed. Good. For example, when the “rotor effect 01” is executed by the main CPU 301, the sub CPU 412 gives a greater number of games that can be played on the ART than when the “rotor effect 01” is not executed. , It is possible to shift to a mode in which the number of ART games can be easily added.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 01” is performed when the start lever 10 is operated, that is, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. It is not limited to. For example, when one of the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw or right stop switch 13sw detects the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player, the "rotation effect 01" is performed. Alternatively, after any of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detects the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are further stopped by the player. , 13 may be performed when the operation is detected, or when all stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player, You may perform "rotation effect 01".

(Cylinder effect 02)
“Rotating stage effect 02” is a winning order “01” or “02” determined in the RT2 gaming state, and the operating order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 is a predetermined order, and the red 7 replay 02, or a spinning effect that is performed after a predetermined number of games have been played based on the combination of symbols related to part of the follow replay being displayed on the active line. The “rotation effect 02” is a rotation effect in which a predetermined lottery is performed when the winning area is “20” to “36”, and the contents of the rotation effect can be rewritten based on the winning of the lottery. It is. That is, while a predetermined number of games are being played, the “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order” "Bell B1", "Push order bell B2", "Push order bell B3", "Push order bell B4", "Technical intervention", "Common bell", "Weak watermelon", "Strong watermelon", "Weak cherry" When “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance” or “strong chance” is determined, the contents of the spinning effect can be rewritten.

  Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 determines “01” to “02” as the winning areas, and sets the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw to the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in a predetermined order. Based on the detection of the operation, a process of setting “48” to the value of the spinning drum effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter for each “1” game. Then, when the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter is “1” or more and the winning area is “20” to “36”, based on the rotation effect 02 lottery effect lottery table described later, Based on the fact that the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 when the lottery effect 02 is performed and the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter becomes “0”, the reel After swinging 17 in the forward and reverse directions for a certain period of time, a spinning effect such as rotating the reel 17 in the reverse direction is performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of spinning drum effects 02 are provided. Specifically, (a) the reel 17 is swung for a predetermined time, and a wait process for a predetermined time is performed based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw or the elapse of the predetermined time. Rotation effect of rotating the reel 17 forward (hereinafter referred to as “rotation effect 02-01”), (b) The reel 17 is swung for a predetermined time, and the start switch 10 sw detects the operation of the start lever 10. Or, based on the elapse of a predetermined time, and then rotating the reel 17 in reverse (hereinafter referred to as “rotating effect 02-02”), and (c) swinging the reel 17 for a predetermined time to start Based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the switch 10sw or the elapse of a predetermined time, the weight processing for a predetermined time is performed, and then the reset is performed. The reel-effect rotated reversely Le 17 (hereinafter, referred to as "reel-effect 02-03") are provided. Then, the main CPU 301 performs (a) the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8 for inserting medals and the start lever 10 for starting the rotation of the reel 17 while the spinning effect 02 is being executed (predetermined time). (C) The control which invalidates the operation of the settlement button, etc. is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 02” is performed when the start switch 10sw detects an operation of the start lever 10 by the player, but is not limited thereto. For example, the “rotation effect 02” may be performed when other switches such as the 1BET switch 7sw, the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw, and the settlement switch 9sw detect an operation by the player.

(Cylinder effect 03)
“Rotating effect 03” is a rotating effect that can be performed when the winning area is “04” to “06”. In other words, this is a spinning effect that can be performed when “the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4”, “the BAR matching replay 02 during RT4” or “the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4” is determined as the winning area.

  Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines, in the internal lottery process described later, that “RT4 BAR-matched replay 01”, “RT4 BAR-matched replay 02” or “RT4 BAR-matched replay 03” is determined as the winning area. In addition, a lottery is performed based on a reeling effect lottery table for the rotating effect 03 described later. Then, the main CPU 301 wins the lottery, and when the symbol related to “BAR2” is aligned with the middle line and the right-up line, or the symbol related to “BAR2” is aligned with the middle-line and the right-down line. On the basis of the above, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 in the next game, the control for executing the “rotation effect 03” is performed.

  Here, “RT4 BAR uniform replay 01”, “RT4 BAR uniform replay 02” and “RT4 BAR uniform replay 03” are winning areas that can be determined in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, the “rotation effect 03” is a rotation effect that can be executed when the gaming state is the RT4 gaming state.

  Further, when executing the “rotation effect 03”, the main CPU 301 operates the 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 to use medals necessary for the game for “about 29600 ms”. Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, processing based on the operations is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 03” is performed when the start switch 10sw detects an operation of the start lever 10 by the player, but is not limited thereto. For example, the “rotation effect 03” may be performed when other switches such as the 1BET switch 7sw, the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw, and the settlement switch 9sw detect an operation by the player.

(Cylinder effect 04)
“Rotating drum effect 04” is a rotating drum effect performed when the winning area is “29” to “36”. In other words, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak chance”, “medium chance” or “strong chance” are determined as the winning areas. This is a revolving effect that can be performed.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery process described later in the RT5 gaming state, the main CPU 301 selects “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “weak” as winning areas. When “chance eyes”, “medium chance eyes”, or “strong chance eyes” are determined, a lottery is performed based on a spinning effect lottery table for the rotating effect 04 described later. And main CPU301 performs control which performs "rotation effect 04" based on having won the said lottery.

  In addition, the “rotation effect 04” is provided with effect times S1 to S4 for performing the rotation effect 04. When the production time S1 is determined, during the “about 2384 ms”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 and the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 for using the medals necessary for the game, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start the rotation of the right reel 17c, the processing based on the operation is not performed.

  Similarly, when the production time S2 is determined, the production time S3 is determined to be “about 4768 ms”. When the production time S3 is determined, the production time S4 is determined to be “about 9499 ms”. After performing the operation, the operation of the 1BET button 7 and the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 to use the medals necessary for the game, and the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c for “about 4381 ms”. Even if the start lever 10 is operated to start the operation, processing based on the operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “rotation effect 04” is performed when all the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13, but the present invention is not limited to this. Never happen. For example, when the start switch 10sw detects an operation by the player, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed, and any one of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw is a game among the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw. When the operation of the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player is detected, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed, or any one of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw is stopped by the player. After detecting the above operation, the “rotation effect 04” may be performed when the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player.

  It should be noted that in the “rotation effect 01” to “rotation effect 04”, the operation of the 1BET button 7 or the MAX-BET button 8 for using a medal and the operation of the start lever 10 for starting the rotation of the reel 17 Even when the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is detected, the time during which processing based on the operation is not performed can be set as appropriate.

(Cylinder production lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 24, a spinning effect lottery table will be described.

  The spinning effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302. In addition, the spinning effect lottery table defines a winning area and a lottery value for each winning area.

  In addition, the rotation effect drawing lottery table corresponding to each of the rotation effect 01 to the rotation effect 04 is provided. Specifically, (a) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 01, (b) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 02, (c) a rotation effect lottery table for the rotation effect 03, (d). A rotation effect drawing lottery table for the rotation effect 04 is stored in the main ROM 302.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 01)
As shown in FIG. 24A, the lottery value for the spinning effect 01 for the spinning effect 01 defines the lottery value for the winning area “07”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when the winning area “07” is determined, it is determined that the spinning effect 01 is executed at “63/253”, and the spinning is performed at “190/253”. It is determined not to execute the effect 01.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Cylinder effect 02)
As shown in FIG. 24B, the lottery value in the case of the winning areas “20” to “36” is defined in the spinning effect lottery table for the rotating effect 02. Specifically, when the winning areas “20” to “36” are determined in the internal lottery process described later, the spinning effect 02-01 is generated based on the lottery value corresponding to each winning area. It is determined whether or not to rewrite the production 02-02 or the spinning production 02-03.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 03)
As shown in FIG. 24C, the lottery value for the spinning effect 03 for the spinning effect 03 defines the lottery values for the winning areas “04” to “06”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are determined, it is determined to execute the spinning effect 03 at “120/253”, and “133/253”. ”Is determined not to execute the rotation effect 03.

(Circulation effect lottery table for Crotch effect 04)
As shown in FIG. 24 (d), the spinning effect lottery table for the spinning effect 04 defines the lottery values in the case of winning areas “29” to “36”. Specifically, in the internal lottery process to be described later, when the winning areas “29” to “36” are determined, whether or not to execute the spinning effect 02 based on the lottery value corresponding to each winning area. Is determined.

(Direction block table)
Next, the effect block table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, FIG. 25 is a figure which shows the effect block tables 1-3, and FIG. 26 is a figure which shows the effect block tables 4-9.

  The effect block tables 1 to 9 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the spinning effect, and effect block data is defined. The effect block data defines a correction target reel, a movable reel, a correction flag, an offset value of an effect phase table (to be described later) used when executing the spinning effect, and an effect block end flag. .

(Correction reel)
The data corresponding to the correction target reel defined in the effect block data is composed of “3” bit data. When the bit “0” is ON, the right reel 17c is the correction target reel. When the bit “1” is ON, it indicates that the middle reel 17b is a correction target reel, and when the bit “2” is ON, it indicates that the left reel 17a is a correction target reel. Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for correcting the rotation direction of the reel based on the correction flag and the data corresponding to the correction target reel during the spinning effect.

(Movable reel)
The data corresponding to the movable reel specified in the production block data is composed of “3” bit data, and when the bit “0” is ON, it indicates that the right reel 17c is a movable reel. When the bit “1” is ON, it indicates that the middle reel 17b is a movable reel, and when the bit “2” is ON, it indicates that the left reel 17a is a movable reel. Therefore, the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 based on data corresponding to the movable reel during the spinning effect.

(Correction flag)
The data corresponding to the correction flag defined in the effect block data is composed of “1” bit data. When the bit corresponding to the correction flag is ON, the main CPU 301 performs control to correct the rotation direction of the reel during the spinning effect based on the data corresponding to the correction target reel.

(Direction block end flag)
Data corresponding to the effect block end flag defined in the effect block data is a flag for ending execution of the effect block table. For example, when the production block table 1 is executed, No. Since the production block end flag is defined in the column 2, no. After the process related to the effect block data in the column 1 is completed, the process based on the effect block table 1 is ended.

(Direction phase table)
Next, the effect phase table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  27 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 1 to 10, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 11 to 20, and FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the effect phase tables 21 to 31.

  The effect phase tables 1 to 31 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the spinning effect, and store effect phase data. Here, the effect phase data includes (a) the number of executions, (b) a correction flag, (c) a type of a rotation effect execution table (described later) used when executing the rotation effect, and (d) The phase end flag is specified.

(Number of executions)
The data corresponding to the number of executions defined in the effect phase data is the number of times the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are controlled based on a rotation effect execution table to be described later when the rotation effect is executed. is there. For example, when the effect phase table 1 is used, the spinning effect execution data of the rotating effect execution table 18 is executed “1119” times.

(Correction flag)
The data corresponding to the correction flag defined in the effect phase data is composed of “1” bit data. When the bit corresponding to the correction flag is ON, correction is performed. Specifically, when the correction flag defined in the effect phase tables 1 to 31 is ON, the main CPU 301 changes the rotation direction of the reel according to the stop position of the reel 17 when performing the spinning effect. Control to correct.

(Phase end flag)
Data corresponding to the phase end flag defined in the effect phase data is a flag for ending execution of the effect phase table. For example, when the production phase table 1 is executed, no. Since the phase end flag is defined in the column 2, no. After the process related to the effect phase data in the column 1 is completed, the process based on the effect phase table 1 is ended.

(Cylinder production execution table)
Next, based on FIG. 30 to FIG. 31, the spinning effect execution table will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the spinning effect execution tables 1 to 9, and FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the spinning effect execution tables 10 to 19.

  The rotation effect execution tables 1 to 19 are stored in the main ROM 302 and are used when executing the rotation effect, and store the rotation effect execution data. Here, the rotation effect, the four-phase OFF flag, the excitation holding count, and the rotation effect execution table end flag are defined in the rotation effect execution data.

(Direction of rotation)
The data corresponding to the rotation direction defined in the rotation effect execution data is data relating to the rotation direction of the reel 17 when executing the rotation effect. Specifically, the rotation direction of the reel is corrected by adding data corresponding to the rotation direction to the data of the current excitation pattern.

(4-phase OFF flag)
Data corresponding to the four-phase OFF flag defined in the spinning effect execution data is a flag for turning off all the excitation phases A to D of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. Specifically, when the value of the four-phase OFF flag is “1”, the main CPU 301 performs control to turn off all the excitation phases A to D of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. .

(Excitation holding frequency)
Data corresponding to the number of times of excitation holding defined in the spinning effect execution data is a value used to move the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, and holds each excitation phase of A phase to D phase. It is a value indicating time. For this reason, the larger the value of the number of times of excitation holding defined in the spinning drum performance execution tables 1 to 19 is, the longer the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the above-mentioned rotation direction for a longer time.

(Cylinder effect execution table end flag)
The rotation effect execution table end flag defined in the rotation effect execution table 1 to 31 is a flag for ending the execution of the rotation effect execution table. For example, when executing the rotation effect execution execution table 1, no. No. 2 has a rotation effect execution table end flag defined therein. After the processing related to the spinning effect execution data in the column 1 is completed, the processing based on the spinning effect execution table 1 is ended.

(Pulse data table)
Next, the pulse data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pulse data table is stored in the main ROM 302, and each of the excitation phases of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, that is, the A phase to the D phase, and the positions (a) to (h) (see FIG. 5). It is prescribed about data concerning.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the reel control board 100 controls the driving of the reel 17 by 1-2 phase excitation with respect to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. The main ROM 302 stores a pulse data table (see FIG. 32A) in the case of 1-2 phase excitation.

  Specifically, the pulse data table stores eight pieces of pulse data from (a) position to (h) position, and these pulse data are AB phase, B phase, BC phase, C phase, respectively. This is data for requesting excitation for the phase, CD phase, C phase, AD phase, and A phase. The main control board 300 sequentially reads eight pulse data from the (a) position to the (h) position specified in the pulse data table, and outputs a pulse signal to each phase required by the pulse data. When the output of the pulse signal based on the (h) position is completed, the reel returns to the (a) position, and the reel rotates forward by outputting the pulse signal based on the (a) position.

  Here, pulse signals are output in the order of (a) position, (b) position, (c) position, (d) position, (e) position, (f) position, (g) position, and (h) position. As a result, the reel 17 rotates in the forward direction, but the (h) position, (g) position, (f) position, (e) position, (d) position, (c) position, (b) position, (a ) By outputting pulse signals in the order of positions, the reel 17 rotates in the reverse direction. Here, the “forward direction” refers to the fact that the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front and the symbols visible through the display window 21 rotate from the upper direction to the lower direction, and the “reverse direction” refers to the gaming machine 1. The symbol that is visible from the front and visible by the display window 21 rotates from the lower direction to the upper direction.

  In the present embodiment, the reel control board 100 controls the driving of the reel 17 by 1-2 phase excitation with respect to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, drive control of the reel 17 may be performed by two-phase excitation. In this case, the main ROM 302 stores a pulse data table (see FIG. 32B) in the case of two-phase excitation.

(State transition diagram managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display the normal background on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the image control unit 420 of the effect control board 410 in the normal state.

(Normal background)
As described above, the normal background is a background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the normal state. Here, in this embodiment, (a) normal background A, (b) normal background B, and (c) normal background C are provided as the normal background. When the sub CPU 402 displays the normal background on the liquid crystal display device 46, any one of the normal backgrounds A to C is selected from the normal background A to the normal background C via the image control unit 420 of the effect control board 410. The control to display on 46 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to switch and display the normal background A to the normal background C under a predetermined condition via the image control unit 420 of the effect control board 410.

(A precursor stage A)
The precursor stage A is a stage that suggests transition to a Bonus preparation state described later. In addition, the sign stage A can be shifted after a continuous performance is performed in a normal state. Here, in the present embodiment, in particular, before the predetermined number of games from the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state determined based on the Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table (see FIG. 39) described later. The rate of transition from the state to the precursor stage A is high. Similarly, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the ratio of the transition from the normal state to the precursor stage A before a predetermined number of games out of the range of the number of games that is defined with a high lottery value It is high. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus ready state.

(Self-releasing mode)
The self-releasing mode is a mode in which a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “Bell” being displayed on the active line. Here, in the present embodiment, after determining that the sub CPU 402 shifts to the self-releasing mode, as a condition for ending the self-releasing mode, (a) until “10” game is played, or (b) “20” A control is performed to determine whether the game is played. Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the Bonus preparation state when the lottery to shift to the Bonus preparation state is won in the self-release mode. On the other hand, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the normal state when the end condition determined by the lottery is satisfied and the shift to the Bonus preparation state is not won.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 displays a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the internal lottery process described later. Control for notifying the stop operation order by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. Thus, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in the notified stop operation order, thereby Since it can be displayed on the combination effective line of the symbol related to “Bell”, it is possible to receive a lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery for the transition to the Bonus ready state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “Bell” being displayed on the active line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. No. For example, based on the fact that another symbol combination different from the symbol combination related to “Bell” is displayed on the active line, a lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state may be performed, or an internal lottery process described later , A lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state may be performed based on the determination of a predetermined winning area.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 has either (a) a game of “10” game or (b) a game of “20” game as an end condition of the self-releasing mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the termination condition of the self-releasing mode can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set a condition that (c) a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state is won.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus preparation state is a state before the transition to the Bonus state, and (a) when the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0” in the normal state or the precursor stage A, (b) This is a state to be transferred when winning the lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state performed in the self-releasing mode. The Bonus ready state includes (a) a Bonus ready state A that is a state before the transition to the Bonus state A, (b) a Bonus ready state B that is a state before the transition to the Bonus state B, and (c) a Bonus state. It is constituted by a Bonus preparation state C which is a state before shifting to C. Here, in the Bonus preparation state, when the winning areas “08” to “11” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Preparation Replay” on the active line. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, after the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 determines the winning areas “20” to “27” by internal lottery processing described later until the transition to the Bonus state. When determined, the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 suitable for displaying the combination of symbols related to "Bell" on the effective line is indicated by the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c and the liquid crystal display device. The control which notifies by 46 is performed. Further, in the Bonus preparation state, when the winning areas “01” to “03” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 performs the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) described later or promotes. Based on the lottery result using the lottery table (see FIG. 42), the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 are controlled to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like. Then, the sub CPU 402 selects one of the Bonus state A to the Bonus state C based on the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 replay”, “Blue 7 replay”, or “Follow replay” being displayed on the active line. Control to shift to.

(Bonus state)
In the Bonus state, a Bonus state A to a Bonus state C are provided. In the following, each Bonus state will be described.

(Bonus state A)
The Bonus state A is an advantageous state for the player. In addition, in the bonus state A, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later. Control for notifying the appropriate stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game number determining state when the navigation stock described later is acquired during the “20” game after shifting to the Bonus state A, and shifts to the Bonus state A. Control to shift to the withdrawal state A after displaying a result screen that displays the number of medals obtained in the Bonus state A, etc., if the navigation stock described later cannot be obtained during the “20” game I do.

(Bonus state B)
The Bonus state B is an advantageous state for the player. In addition, in the bonus state B, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later. Control for notifying the appropriate stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. Then, after the transition to the Bonus state B, the sub CPU 402 includes information related to the “rotation effect 02-02” or information related to the “rotation effect 02-03” during the “48” game. Based on the reception of the reel rotation start acceptance command described later, control is performed to shift to the ART game number determination state after the “48” game after the transition to the Bonus preparation state B, and the “rotation effect 02-02”. When such information or a reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) that includes information related to “rotating drum effect 02-03” is not received, control for shifting to the pull-back state A is performed.

  Further, the sub CPU 402 receives the reel rotation start acceptance command including the information related to the “rotating drum effect 02-01”, and on the basis of a later-described recovery lottery table (see FIG. 49), If a lottery is performed and the lottery is won, control for shifting to the ART game number determination state is performed.

(Bonus state C)
The Bonus state C is an advantageous state for the player. In addition, in the Bonus state C, when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Bell” on the active line. Control for notifying the appropriate stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs control to end the bonus state C and shift to the ART game number determination state based on the fact that the “48” game has been played since the bonus state C started. The Bonus state A, Bonus state B, and Bonus state C may be collectively referred to as “Bonus state”.

  In this embodiment, in the RT3 gaming state, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line has a straight line with a red 7 symbol, a blue 7 symbol, or a BAR1 symbol. If it is displayed on the screen, etc. Then, in the Bonus state, the sub CPU 402 appropriately displays the combination of symbols related to “Bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later. The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 is controlled by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “Bonus state” means the first type special combination (RB), the second type special combination (CB), and the first type special combination continuous action device (BB). ), An ART that appears as if the accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special accessory is operating.

  In this embodiment, even if the player cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to “follow replay” is displayed on the active line. Therefore, even if the player cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, the game can be enjoyed.

(Retraction state A)
The withdrawal state A is a state in which a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state is performed when a predetermined winning area is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Here, in this embodiment, when the winning areas “28” to “35” are determined, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery for shifting to the Bonus preparation state, and based on the fact that the lottery is won, the Bonus preparation is performed. Control to shift to the state. Further, in the withdrawal state A, the sub CPU 402 determines the winning areas “20” to “27”, the symbol combination related to “Bell” is not displayed on the active line, and the symbol combination related to “Blank” is displayed. Based on the fact that is displayed on the active line, control for shifting to the normal state is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 is appropriate for displaying the combination of symbols related to the bell on the effective line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the withdrawal state A. The stop operation order is not notified. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the playability in the withdrawal state A is determined by determining the winning areas “28” to “35” before the symbol combination related to the blank is displayed on the active line, and the Bonus ready state. It is a game that wins the lottery to shift to.

(ART game number determination state)
The ART game number determination state includes an ART game number determination state A and an ART game number determination state B.

(ART game number determination state A)
The ART game number determination state A is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in an ART game. When (a) Bonus state A acquires navigation stock described later, (b) In Bonus state B When the reel rotation start acceptance command including the information related to “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03” is received, (c) related to “rotation effect 02-01” When the reel rotation start acceptance command including the information is received, the process is shifted to a case where a later-described revival lottery is won. Here, after the transition to the ART game number determination state A, when the winning area “19” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 selects the combination of symbols related to “RT4 transition replay” as an effective line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 suitable for display on the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, in the ART game number determination state A after the symbol combination related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 receives the winning areas “04” to “06”. The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in which the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line on condition that the number of navigation stocks described later is “1” or more is the stop operation order. Control which notifies by the display lamps 30a-30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. On the other hand, in the ART game number determination state A, the sub CPU 402 relates to “RUSH replay” when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won and the number of navigation stocks described later is “0”. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 where the combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the ART game based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 45). Make a lottery to decide. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line.

(ART game number determination state B)
The ART game number determination state B is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in an ART game, and is a state that is shifted to after the Bonus state C ends. Here, after the transition to the ART game number determination state B, when the winning area “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 determines the combination of symbols related to “RT4 transition replay” as the effective line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 suitable for display on the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. When the winning areas “04” to “06” are selected in the ART game number determination state B after the symbol combination related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line, The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in which the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line on condition that the number of navigation stocks described later is “1” or more is the stop operation order. Control which notifies by the display lamps 30a-30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. On the other hand, in the ART game number determination state B, the sub CPU 402 relates to “RUSH replay” when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won and the navigation stock number described later is “0”. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 where the combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won, the sub CPU 402 adds to the number of games that can be played in the ART game based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 45) described later. Make a lottery to determine the number. Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination state B is more easily determined as a number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the determined ART state than the ART game number determination state A. Therefore, it is an advantageous state for the player. The ART game number determination state A and the ART game number determination state B may be collectively referred to as “ART game number determination state” in some cases.

  Note that, after the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B is completed, the state may be shifted to the ART game number determination state B. For example, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery for shifting to the ART game number determination state B based on the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B, and determines the number of ART games when the lottery is won. Control for shifting to the state B may be performed. Here, the larger the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state B, the easier it is to move to the ART game number determination state B, and the sub CPU 402 makes a lottery based on a lottery table in which a lottery value is defined. It is possible to do it.

(ART state)
The ART state is composed of an ART game, a precursor stage B, an ART Bonus preparation state, an ART Bonus state, and an ART game number addition state. The ART state is a state in which, in the ART game number determination state, a transition is made based on the combination of symbols related to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line. Further, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games played in the ART state based on the number of games determined by adding the number of games determined in the ART game number determination state and the number of games added in the ART state, After performing control to display a result screen for displaying the number of acquired medals and the like on the liquid crystal display device 46, control to shift to the withdrawal state B is performed.

(ART game)
In the ART game, the sub CPU 402 is appropriate for displaying a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the effective line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the internal lottery process described later. Control to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. In the ART game, as long as the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated in accordance with the notified stop operation sequence, the main CPU 301 controls the RT5 gaming state. The probability of winning is higher compared to the RT0 or RT1 gaming state. For this reason, the ART game is an advantageous state for the player.

(A precursor stage B)
The precursor stage B is a stage that suggests a transition to a bonus preparation state during ART described later. In addition, the precursor stage B can be shifted based on satisfying a predetermined condition in the ART game. Here, in the present embodiment, in particular, before the predetermined number of games from the number of games until the transition to the Bonus state during ART determined based on the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) described later. The ratio of transition from the normal state to the precursor stage B is high. Similarly, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the ratio of the transition from the normal state to the precursor stage B before a predetermined number of games out of the range of the number of games with a high lottery value is defined. It is high. Thereby, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus ready state during ART. Note that the precursor stage A and the precursor stage B may be collectively referred to as “precursor stage”.

(Bonus ready state during ART)
The Bonus preparation state during ART is a state before the transition to the Bonus state during ART, and is a state that is shifted when the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter becomes “0”. In addition, the Bonus ready state during ART is (a) ART pre-Bus ready state A, which is the state before the transition to the Bonus state A during ART, and (b) ART state, which is the state before the transition to the Bonus state B during ART. A Bonus preparation state B, (c) an ART-in-Bonus preparation state C, which is a state before transitioning to the ART-in-Bonse state C. Here, when the winning areas “08” to “11” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the bonus preparation state during ART, the sub CPU 402 puts the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” on the active line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 suitable for display by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, after the symbol combination related to “Preparation Replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 performs the winning areas “20” to “27” by an internal lottery process to be described later until the state shifts to the Bonus state during ART. ”Is determined, the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 appropriate for displaying the combination of symbols related to“ Bell ”on the effective line are displayed. Control which notifies by the display device 46 is performed. Further, the sub CPU 402, in the Bonus preparation state during ART, when the winning areas “01” to “03” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) described later, Based on the lottery result using the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42), the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 are controlled to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like. Do. Then, the sub CPU 402 determines that a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay”, “Blue 7 Replay”, or “Follow Replay” is displayed on the active line. Control to shift to any one of C is performed.

(Bonus state during ART)
The Bonus state during ART includes a Bonus state A during ART, a Bonus state B during ART, and a Bonus state C during ART.

(Bonus state A during ART)
The Bonus state A during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, the sub CPU 402 displays a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the effective line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the bonus state A during ART. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the sub CPU 402 acquires the navigation stock described later during the “20” game after shifting to the bonus state A during ART, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game number addition state, and the bonus state during ART. If the navigation stock described later cannot be acquired during the “20” game after the transition to A, an ART continuation screen for notifying that the ART game will continue is displayed, and then control for shifting to the ART game is performed. Do.

(Bonus state B during ART)
The Bonus state B during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the Bonus state B during ART. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, the sub CPU 402 includes information related to the “rotation effect 02-02” or information related to the “rotation effect 02-03” during the “48” game after the transition to the bonus state B during ART. On the basis of the reception of the reel rotation start acceptance command described later, control is performed to shift to the ART game number additional state after “48” games after shifting to the Bonus state B during ART. ART notifying that the ART game will be continued if a reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) that includes information related to “-02” or information related to “rotor effect 02-03” is not received. After the continuation screen is displayed, control for shifting to the ART game is performed.

  Further, the sub CPU 402 receives the reel rotation start acceptance command including the information related to the “rotating drum effect 02-01”, and on the basis of a later-described recovery lottery table (see FIG. 49), If a lottery is performed and the lottery is won, control for shifting to the ART game number addition state is performed.

(Bus state C during ART)
The Bonus state C during ART is an advantageous state for the player. Further, the sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the bonus state C during ART. Therefore, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the appropriate stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, based on the fact that the “48” game has been played since the Bonus state C during ART started, the sub CPU 402 ends the Bonus state C during ART and shifts to the state in which the number of ART games is added. Do. Note that the Bonus state A during ART, the Bonus state B during ART, and the Bonus state C during ART may be collectively referred to as “Bus state during ART”.

  In this embodiment, in the RT3 gaming state, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line has a straight line with a red 7 symbol, a blue 7 symbol, or a BAR1 symbol. If it is displayed on the screen, etc. The sub CPU 402 displays the symbol combination related to “Bell” on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later in the Bonus state during ART. The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 appropriate for the control is notified by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “Bon state during ART” means the first-type special combination (RB), second-type special combination (CB), and first-type special combination continuous action device. (BB) is an ART that appears as if the accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special accessory is operating.

  In this embodiment, even if the player cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to “follow replay” is displayed on the active line. Therefore, even if the player cannot operate the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 at an appropriate timing, the game can be enjoyed.

(Art game added)
The ART game number addition state is composed of an ART game number addition state A and an ART game number addition state B.

(ART game number addition state A)
The ART game number addition state A is a state for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART game. When (a) Bonus state A acquires navigation stock described later, (b) Bonus state B When the information included in the reel rotation start reception command is “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03”, (c) included in a reel rotation start reception command described later. The information is “rotation effect 02-01”, and the state is shifted to a case where a later-described revival lottery is won. Here, after the transition to the ART game number addition state A is made and the winning area “19” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 determines the combination of symbols related to “RT4 transition replay” as an effective line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 suitable for display on the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the winning area “04” to “06” is won in the ART game number addition state A after the symbol combination related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in which the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line on condition that the number of navigation stocks described later is “1” or more is the stop operation order. Control which notifies by the display lamps 30a-30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 402 relates to “RUSH replay” when the winning area “04” to “06” is won in the state A in which the number of ART games is added and the navigation stock number described later is “0”. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 where the combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the ART game based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 45). Make a lottery to decide. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line.

(Art game number added state B)
The ART game number addition state B is a state for adding the number of games that can be played in the ART game, and is a state that is shifted to after the Bonus state C ends. Here, after the transition to the ART game number addition state B is made and the winning area “19” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 selects the combination of symbols related to “RT4 transition replay” as an effective line. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 suitable for display on the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. Then, when the winning area “04” to “06” is won in the ART game number addition state B after the combination of symbols related to “RT4 transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the sub CPU 402 The stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in which the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line on condition that the number of navigation stocks described later is “1” or more is the stop operation order. Control which notifies by the display lamps 30a-30c and the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 402 relates to “RUSH replay” when the winning area “04” to “06” is won and the number of navigation stocks described later is “0” in the ART game number addition state B. Control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 where the combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line by the stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c and the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, when the winning areas “04” to “06” are won, the sub CPU 402 adds to the number of games that can be played in the ART game based on an additional game number determination table (see FIG. 45) described later. Make a lottery to determine the number. Further, the sub CPU 402 performs control to shift to the ART game based on the combination of symbols related to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line. In the present embodiment, the ART game number added state B is easier to determine a larger value as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the determined ART state than the ART game number added state A. Therefore, it is an advantageous state for the player. In some cases, the ART game number added state A and the ART game number added state B are collectively referred to as “ART game number added state”.

  Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART game bonus state A after the ART-in-Bus state A or the ART-in-Bus state B ends. For example, when the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery for shifting to the ART game number addition state B based on the number of navigation stocks acquired in the Bonus state A during ART or the Bonus state B during ART and wins the lottery. Control to shift to the ART game number addition state B may be performed. Here, the more the number of navigation stocks acquired in the bonus state A during ART or the bonus state B during ART, the easier the sub CPU 402 moves to the ART game number addition state B, and the lottery value is defined in the lottery table. A lottery can be considered based on this.

(Retraction state B)
The withdrawal state B is a state in which a lottery for shifting to an ART game is performed when a predetermined winning area is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the winning areas “28” to “35” are determined, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to shift to the ART game, and based on the fact that the lottery is won, Perform transition control. Further, in the withdrawal state B, the sub CPU 402 determines the winning areas “20” to “27”, the symbol combination related to “Bell” is not displayed on the effective line, and the symbol combination related to the blank is effective. Based on what is displayed on the line, control to shift to the normal state is performed. Note that the pullback state A and the pullback state B may be collectively referred to as “retracted state”.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 causes the combination of symbols related to “Bell” to be displayed on the active line when the winning areas “20” to “27” are determined in the withdrawal state B. An appropriate stop operation order is not notified. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the playability in the withdrawal state B is determined by determining the winning areas “28” to “35” before the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, and ART. It is a game that wins a lottery to shift to a game.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state name and the number corresponding to each state name, and the state managed by the sub control board in this embodiment has the state number “01”. “Normal state”, “Retraction state A” with a state number “02”, “Retraction state B” with a state number “03”, “A precursor stage A” with a state number “04”, and a state number “ "05 Prelude Stage B", "Self-Release Mode" with State Number "06", "Bonus State A" with State Number "07", "Bonus State B" with State Number "08", State Number Is “09”, “Bonus state C”, state number “10”, “Bus state A during ART”, “11 BON state B during ART” with state number “11”, “ART” with state number “12” Middle Bonus state C ”and state number“ “ART game” with state number “14”, “ART game number determination state A” with state number “14”, “ART game number determination state B” with state number “15”, and “ART game” with state number “16” "Number addition state A", "ART game number addition state B" with state number "17", "Bonus preparation state A" with state number "18", "Bonus preparation state B" with state number "19", “Bonus ready state C” with state number “20”, “Bon ready state A ART” with state number “21”, “Bonus ready state B with ART” with state number “22”, and state number “ No. 23 ”“ BON ready state C during ART ”is defined.

(Push order notification effect determination table)
Next, the push order notification effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The push order notification effect determination table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and defines which push order is notified when the sub CPU 402 notifies the push order. Specifically, the push order notification effect determination table is defined with respect to contents for notifying the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the state name and the gaming state.

  For example, in the withdrawal state A, when the current gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, “RT3 replay navigation” or “RT4 transition replay removal navigation” is executed. Specifically, in the withdrawal state A, when the winning areas “13” to “19” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 412 determines that the symbol combination related to “normal replay” is on the effective line. Control for informing the stop operation order displayed on the screen is performed.

  In particular, the sub CPU 402 relates to a part of “red 7 replay 02” or “follow replay” when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus ready state B or the ART-in-Busn ready state B. When the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line and the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the RT3 gaming state, and “20” to “27” are determined by the internal lottery process described later, The sub CPU 402 performs control to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 a stop operation sequence for displaying the symbol combination related to “bell” on the effective line.

  When the player does not follow the stop operation order displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 by the sub CPU 402 and the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the player is managed by the main control board 300. The state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Thereafter, when the winning areas “08” to “11” are determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 performs a stop operation sequence for displaying the combination of symbols related to “preparation replay” on the active line. Control for notifying is performed. As a result, the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Thereafter, in the internal lottery process described later, winning areas “01” to “02” are determined, and “48” from when the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay” or “Follow Replay” is displayed on the active line. When the game is played, the revolving effect 02 is to be executed. However, after transitioning to the Bonus state B or the Bonus state B during ART, the combination of symbols related to “blank” When “48” game is played after the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 02” or “Follow Replay” is displayed on the active line again, The production 02 is executed. Then, there arises a problem that consistency between the spinning effect 02 performed at the end of the Bonus state B or the Bonus state B during ART and the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 46 cannot be achieved.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the RT2 gaming state, the winning areas “01” to “02” are determined by the internal lottery process described later. In addition, the sub CPU 402 performs a control to display the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 that shift to the RT3 gaming state but the spinning effect 02 is not performed as the stop operation order displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Do. Specifically, when the winning area “01” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display an image prompting the user to operate from the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46. Do. On the other hand, when the winning area “02” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display an image prompting the user to operate from the left stop button 11 on the liquid crystal display device 46. As a result, the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, so that a part of “Red 7 Replay 02” or “Follow Replay” is first displayed. When the “48” game is played after the combination of symbols related to is displayed on the activated line, the spinning effect 02 is executed. As a result, the problem that the consistency between the spinning effect 02 performed at the end of the Bonus state B or the Bonus state B during the ART and the effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 46 does not occur. In addition, the main CPU 301 does not need to provide a process for returning to the RT3 gaming state even when the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed in the RT3 gaming state and the state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state. Therefore, the processing burden on the main control board 300 is not increased.

(Production decision table 1)
Next, the effect determination table 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table 1 is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for determining an effect performed in a normal state or the like. Specifically, “Production No.” and production contents corresponding to “Production No.” are defined.

  Further, the push order navigation of “effect No. 070” has different effects determined based on the winning area determined in the internal lottery process described later, the current state managed by the sub CPU 402, and the like. Specifically, the content of the effect is determined based on the push order notification effect determination table (see FIG. 35).

(Production decision table 2)
Next, the effect determination table 2 will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table 2 is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for determining an effect performed in the Bonus state or the like. Specifically, as in the effect determination table 1, “effect No.” and effect contents corresponding to “effect No.” are defined.

  The effect determination table 2 is similar to the effect determination table 1 in order to execute effects based on the winning area determined in the internal lottery process described later, the current state managed by the sub CPU 402, and the like. The conditions are specified.

(Production decision table 3)
Next, the effect determination table 3 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table 3 is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for determining an effect performed in the ART state or the like. Specifically, as with the effect determination table 1 and the effect determination table 2, the “effect No.” and the effect contents corresponding to “effect No.” are defined.

  In addition, the effect determination table 3 is similar to the effect determination table 1 and the effect determination table 2, based on the winning area determined by the internal lottery process described later, the current state managed by the sub CPU 402, and the like. Conditions for performing the production are defined.

(Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus ready state transition game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and when the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line in the pull back state A or the pull back state B, the Bonus ready state transition table is displayed. It is provided to determine the number of games until the state transitions. Specifically, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table defines the range of the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state and the lottery value.

  Here, the lottery value of the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table is provided for each set value, and the lottery value defined for each range of the number of games differs for each set value. In particular, in the present embodiment, the lottery value in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table is defined such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the sub CPU 402 determines the range of the faster game number. Thereby, the higher the set value is, the higher the ratio of the sub CPU 402 that determines the short game number as the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state after the withdrawal state A or the withdrawal state B ends. .

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is “1”, the probability that the “129” game to the “133” game is determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is “0”. On the other hand, when the set value is “6”, the probability that “129” game to “133” game is determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state is “2753/65536”. . Therefore, when the set value is “1”, since “129” to “133” games are not determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, the process until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is performed. When “129” game to “133” game are determined as the number of games, the player can recognize that the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is not “1”.

  In the present embodiment, in the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table, the higher the set value is, the more “129” games to “133” games are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state. The lottery value is defined so that the probability is high. For this reason, the player can estimate the set value by overlapping the number of times that the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state is determined by playing the game for a long time.

  It should be noted that the lottery value for determining the “129” game to the “133” game is defined as the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state only when a specific setting value (for example, the setting value is “6”), For other setting values (for example, the setting values are “1” to “5”), the lottery value for determining the “129” game to the “133” game is defined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. You may make it not. Thereby, when “129” game to “133” game is determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, the player can recognize that it is a specific set value.

  Also, a lottery value for determining “129” game to “133” game is defined as the number of games until the transition to the bonus preparation state only when a specific setting value (for example, the setting value is “4”) or more. In the case of other setting values (for example, the setting values are “1” to “3”), the lottery values for determining “129” games to “133” games as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is made. It may not be specified. Thereby, when the “129” game to the “133” game are determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state, the player can recognize that the game is more than a specific set value.

(Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table for reset)
Next, the reset bonus preparation state transition game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reset-time bonus preparation state transition game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404. The reset bonus preparation state transition game number determination table is used when redetermining the number of games to be transferred to the bonus preparation state in the bonus preparation state transition game number reset process described later (see FIG. 83). In the reset-time Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table, the range of the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state and the lottery value are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) is defined with a high probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state within the first number of games (for example, “128” game). Yes. For this reason, the player who knows that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first number of games is defined to be high is shifted to the Bonus ready state based on the Bonus ready state shift game number determination table. After the number of games is determined, it is assumed that the first game number game is performed and the game is ended. Then, the other player who knows that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first number of games is defined to be high is the gaming machine 1 that has finished the game after playing the first number of games. Since the game is not going to be played, the operation of the gaming machine falls.

  On the other hand, the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table for reset is defined with a high probability of transitioning to the Bonus ready state by the first game number (for example, “128” game). For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, the probability of selecting the reset of the number of bonus preparation state transition games described later and shifting to the bonus preparation state by the first number of games is In the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, compared with the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state by the first game number without selecting the reset of the Bonus ready state transition game number described later. Highly regulated.

  Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1 in which the first game number of games has been performed, a player who plays only a short number of games (for example, “128” game) has selected to reset the Bonus ready state transition game number described later. However, it can be said that this is advantageous compared to the case where the resetting of the number of bonus preparation state transition games described later is not selected.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, if the reset of the number of Bonus ready state transition games described later is not selected, after the game of the first number of games is performed, Within the “649” game (“777” game- “128” game), the player always shifts to the Bonus ready state. On the other hand, when the number of Bonus preparation state transition games is reset, there is a possibility that the transition to the Bonus preparation state is not made within the “649” game (“777” game- “128” game).

  For example, after the “300” game is determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state based on the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table of FIG. 39, and the first game number of games is performed, Assume that “700” game has been determined as the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is selected based on the reset Bonus preparation state transfer game number determination table. The number of games required for the transition to the Bonus ready state is “700” after selecting the reset of the number of Bonus ready state transition games to be described later.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 in which the game of the first number of games has been performed, when the number of bonus preparation state transition games is reset, the bonus preparation state is reached by the second game number (for example, “649” game). The probability of transitioning to the bonus preparation state transition game number is not reset, and is lower than the probability of transitioning to the bonus preparation state by the second number of games.

  Accordingly, in the gaming machine 1 in which the first game number of games has been performed, a player who plays only a short number of games (for example, “128” game) is more likely to reset the Bonus preparation state transition game number. It can be said that it is advantageous compared with the case where the number of state transition games is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 in which the first game number of games has been performed, a player who plays a long game number (for example, “649” game) should not reset the Bonus preparation state transition game number. It can be said that it is advantageous compared with the case where the number of state transition games is reset.

  In this embodiment, the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table for reset is defined such that the lottery value differs for each set value. The higher the set value, the shorter the range of the number of games is determined. It is easy to be done. In addition, when the number of games for transition to the Bonus preparation state is reset, the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is defined such that “129” to “133” games are not determined.

  Therefore, when the number of games for shifting to the Bonus preparation state is determined based on the reset-time Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table, the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state is “129” games to Since the “133” game is not determined, the player cannot guess the set value.

  This is because, when a player plays a long game and plays a long game number (for example, “649” game), when the Bonus ready state transition game number is selected, the Bonus ready state transition game is selected. This is an example that is disadvantageous compared to the case where the number reset is not selected.

(Bonus preparation state distribution table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus preparation state distribution table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and is used to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 to be notified when the winning areas “01” to “03” are determined. Is provided. In addition, the Bonus preparation state distribution table is defined for any of the Bonus preparation states A to Bonus preparation state C and the lottery values corresponding to these. Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery value is provided for each set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of shifting to the Bonus preparation state C.

  For example, when the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the lottery using the Bonus preparation state distribution table, the symbol combination related to “Red 7 Replay 01” or “Red 7 Replay 03” may be stopped. Control for notifying the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 notifies that the right stop button 13 is first stopped when the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, a notification that the left stop button 11 is first stopped is given. On the other hand, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning area “03” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “Blue 7 Replay” is obtained by informing that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped. It is not displayed on the active line.

  When the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the lottery using the Bonus preparation state distribution table, the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 02” can be stopped. Control to notify the operation order is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 notifies that the left stop button 11 is first stopped when the winning area “01” is determined in the internal lottery process described later. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, a notification that the right stop button 13 is first stopped is given. On the other hand, in the internal lottery process described later, when the winning area “03” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “Blue 7 Replay” is obtained by informing that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped. It is not displayed on the active line.

  In addition, as a result of the lottery using the Bonus preparation state distribution table, when it is determined to shift to the Bonus state C, the stop button 11, 12, which can stop the combination of symbols related to “Blue 7 Replay”. Control which notifies 13 operation orders is performed. Specifically, when the winning area “03” is determined in the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 notifies that the left stop button 11 is first stopped. On the other hand, when the winning area “01” or “02” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, it is related to “Red 7 Replay” by informing that the middle stop button 12 is first stopped. The combination of symbols is not displayed on the active line.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and after the Bonus preparation state A or the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the lottery based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 30), the Bonus state A or Before the transition to the Bonus state B, it is provided for performing a lottery so that the transition is made to the Bonus preparation state B or the Bonus preparation state C.

  Specifically, the promotion lottery table includes (a) a promotion lottery table for the Bonus preparation state A and (b) an promotion lottery table for the Bonus preparation state B.

(Promotion lottery table for Bonus preparation state A)
In the promotion lottery table for the Bonus preparation state A, as shown in FIG. 42A, the lottery value for each winning area and the Bonus preparation state of the transfer destination are defined. For example, when the winning area “32” is determined in the Bonus preparation state A, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to shift to the Bonus preparation state B at “32768/65536”.

(Promotional lottery table for Bonus ready state B)
In the promotion lottery table for the Bonus preparation state B, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the lottery value for each winning area and the Bonus preparation state of the transfer destination are defined. For example, when the winning area “32” is determined in the Bonus preparation state B, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to move to the Bonus preparation state C at “4128/65536”.

(Restoration lottery table)
Next, the resurrection lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The resurrection lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and the spinning effect performed by the main control board 300 at the end of the Bonus state B or the Bonus state B during ART is “Rotating effect 02-01”. It is provided to draw a lottery whether to shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state. Specifically, lottery values corresponding to (a) winning A, (b) winning B, and (c) non-winning are defined in the resurrection lottery table.

  In addition, when the spinning effect performed by the main control board 300 is “rotating effect 02-01”, the sub CPU 402 enters the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state based on the revival lottery table. If winning A is determined as a result of lottery of whether or not to move, the ART game is performed at the timing when all the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated after the "rotation effect 02-01" is performed. Control is performed to notify the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like of the transition to the number determination state or the ART game number addition state.

  On the other hand, when the spinning effect performed by the main control board 300 is “rotational effect 02-01”, the sub CPU 402 enters the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state based on the resurrection lottery table. If winning B is determined as a result of lottery as to whether or not to move, after the “rotation effect 02-01” is performed, in the next game in which all the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated Then, at the timing when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10, control is performed to notify the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like that the state shifts to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state.

  Here, when the spinning effect performed by the main control board 300 is “rotational effect 02-01”, the sub CPU 402 determines the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state based on the resurrection lottery table. If winning A or winning B is determined as a result of drawing whether or not to shift to “3”, control is performed to store “3” in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Therefore, the resurrection lottery table is used for the lottery performed when the spinning effect 02-01 is executed in the Bonus state B and the Bonus state B during ART.

  In the present embodiment, the resurrection lottery table is used for all setting values when the setting values are “1” to “6”, but is not limited thereto. For example, the sub ROM 404 may store a resurrection lottery table with different lottery values for each set value. In this case, in the revival lottery table in which the lottery value differs for each set value, (a) the higher the set value, the higher the lottery value for winning A and the lottery value for winning B may be defined higher. b) When the set value is an odd number, the lottery value for winning A and the lottery value for winning B may be defined higher than when the set value is an even number, and (c) if the set value is high The higher the value, the higher either the winning value of winning A or the winning value of winning B may be specified. (D) When the set value is an odd number, the set value is an even number. The lottery value for winning A or the lottery value for winning B may be set high.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 draws whether or not to shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state based on the resurrection lottery table, so that the winning A or the winning B is determined. In this case, control is performed to store “3” in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub-RAM 405, but this is not limitative, and the navigation stock storage provided in the sub-RAM 405 is not limited. The value stored in the area can be set as appropriate. In this case, (a) the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 may be a value other than “3”, or (b) the navigation stock provided in the sub RAM 405. The value stored in the storage area may be determined by lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery using the same resurrection lottery table in the Bonus state B and the Bonus state B during ART. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the Bonus state B, when the spinning effect 02-01 is executed in the Bonus state B resurrection lottery table used when the rotating effect 02-01 is executed and in the Bonus state B during ART. The resurrection lottery table for the Bonus state B used during ART may be stored in the sub ROM 404. In this case, (a) the lottery value of the winning A defined in the Bonus state B revival lottery table and the lottery value of the winning A stipulated in the revival lottery table for the Bonus state B during ART are different. (B) The winning B lottery value defined in the Bonus state B resurrection lottery table is different from the winning B lottery value defined in the ART Bonus state B resurrection lottery table. (C) The winning A lottery value specified in the Bonus state B resurrection lottery table and the winning A lottery value specified in the ART Bonus state B resurrection lottery table It may be different according to the set value, or (d) the winning B lottery value defined in the Bonus state B revival lottery table and the ART Bonus state B Lottery value of winning B as defined in revival drawing table may vary according to the set value.

  Whether the transition to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state is made based on the resurrection lottery table when the rotation effect performed by the main control board 300 is “rotation effect 02-01”. As a result of the lottery, if the non-winning is determined, control to store “3” in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is not performed, so the state shifts to the ART game number transition state. There is no.

(ART lottery table during Bonus state A)
Next, the ART lottery table during the Bonus state A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state A ART lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and in the Bonus state A or the Bonus state A during ART, a lottery to determine whether to shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state. Provided to do. Specifically, in the Bonus state A ART lottery table, a winning area, the number of navigation stocks, and a lottery value corresponding to each winning area and the number of navigation stocks are defined. For example, when the winning area “32” is determined in the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 determines not to add the number of navigation stocks with the probability of “26214/65536”, and “32768/65536”. It is decided to add “1” to the number of navigation stocks with the probability of “2”, decide to add “2” to the number of navigation stocks with the probability of “3277/65536”, and the number of navigation stocks with the probability of “3277/65536”. A lottery to decide to add “3” is performed. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 402 performs control to add and store the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the lottery result in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When the value of the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is equal to or greater than “1” at the time when the bonus state A or the bonus state A during ART ends, the sub CPU 402 determines that the number of ART games is determined. Alternatively, control is performed to determine that the lottery for shifting to the state of adding the number of ART games has been won.

(Navistock extra lottery table)
Next, the navigation stock addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Navistock extra lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and is provided to perform an extra lottery for the number of Navistock after winning the lottery based on the ART lottery table during the Bonus state A. Specifically, in the Navistock addition lottery table, a winning area and a lottery value corresponding to each winning area are defined. For example, when the winning area “32” is determined in the internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 performs the lottery by adding the number of navigation stocks with a probability of “13107/65536”. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 402 performs control to add “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 and store it.

(Additional game number determination table)
Next, the added game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and in the ART game number determination state A or the ART game number determination state B, the winning areas “04” to “06” are determined by the internal lottery process described later. Based on this, it is provided for determining the number of games to be added to the value of the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405.

  In addition, the added game number determination table (a) in the ART game number determination state A, when performing a notification for displaying a combination of symbols related to “BAR replay 01” or “BAR replay 03” on the active line And a symbol related to “BAR replay 02” in the ART game number determination state A (hereinafter referred to as “the lottery table for when BAR replay 01, 03 is established during ART game number determination state A”). A lottery table (hereinafter, referred to as “art game number determination state A BAR replay 02 establishment lottery table”) used for notification to display the combination of the two on the active line, and (c) the number of ART games In the decision state B, there is a symbol combination related to “BAR replay 01” or “BAR replay 03”. A lottery table (hereinafter referred to as “art lottery table when BAR replays 01 and 03 are established during the ART game number determination state B”) used when performing notification for display on the line; and (d) an ART game number determination state. B, a lottery table used when notification for displaying the symbol combination related to “BAR replay 02” on the active line (hereinafter referred to as “art game number determination state B BAR replay 02 establishment lottery table. ") Is provided. Then, a lottery table for when BAR replay 01, 03 is established during ART game number determination state A, a lottery table for when BAR replay 02 is established during ART game number determination state A, and BAR replay 01, 03 is established during ART game number determination state B. The lottery table and the lottery table for when the BAR replay 02 is established during the ART game number determination state B are respectively defined for the number of added games and the lottery value.

  For example, in the ART game number determination state A, when performing notification for displaying a combination of symbols related to “BAR replay 01” or “BAR replay 03” on the active line, the sub CPU 402 reads “49086/65536. "10" games are determined as the number of additional games, "20" games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of "5308/65536", and the number of additional games is determined with the probability of "5308/65536" “30” game is determined, “50” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “5308/65536”, and “100” game is determined as the additional game number with the probability of “262/65536”. , “200” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “132/65536”, and “132/6 With a probability of 536 ", perform a lottery to determine the" 300 "game as the number of plus game.

  In addition, in the ART game number determination state A, the BAR replay 01, 03 establishment lottery table shows the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay 01” or “BAR replay 03” on the effective line in the ART game number addition state A. It is also used when performing notification for display on the screen. Similarly, the BAR replay 02 establishment lottery table during ART game number determination state A performs notification for displaying the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay 02” on the active line in the ART game number addition state A. Also used in some cases. Similarly, in the ART game number determination state B, the BAR replay 01, 03 establishment lottery table indicates that the combination of symbols relating to “BAR replay 01” or “BAR replay 03” in the ART game number addition state B is an effective line. It is also used when performing notification for display on the top. Similarly, in the ART game number determination state B, the BAR replay 02 establishment lottery table performs notification for displaying the combination of symbols related to “BAR replay 02” on the active line in the ART game number addition state B. Also used in some cases.

(Navistock lottery table for ART game number determination state)
Next, the ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and is provided for lottery in the ART game number determination state whether or not to add the navigation stock number. Specifically, the navigation game lottery table for the ART game number determination state defines the number of navigation stocks and the lottery values corresponding to the winning areas and the number of navigation stocks. For example, when the winning area “32” is determined in the internal lottery process to be described later, the sub CPU 402 determines to add “1” to the number of navigation stocks with a probability of “62916/65536”. It is determined that “2” is added to the navigation stock number with the probability of “/ 65536”, “3” is added to the navigation stock number with the probability of “655/65536”, and the probability of “655/65536” is determined. A lottery is performed to determine that “4” is added to the number of navigation stocks, and “5” is added to the number of navigation stocks with a probability of “655/65536”. When the lottery is won, the sub CPU 402 performs control to add and store the number of navigation stocks corresponding to the lottery results in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. The ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table is also used in the ART game number addition state, and the same lottery as in the ART game number determination state is performed.

(ART game number lottery table)
Next, the ART game number addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The lottery table for adding the number of ART games is provided in the sub ROM 404. In addition, the ART game number addition lottery table indicates that the number of games that the sub-control board 400 can play in the ART state based on information related to a winning area included in a reel rotation start acceptance command described later received from the main control board 300. It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to.

  For example, when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command described later received from the main control board 300 is information related to “common bell”, the sub CPU 402 has a probability of “4587/65536”. , “10” game is determined as the number of additional games, “20” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “2244/65536”, and “30” is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “678/65536”. A game is determined, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with a probability of “154/65536”, and “100” games are determined as the number of additional games with a probability of “9/65536”. On the other hand, if the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) received from the main control board 300 is information related to the “common bell”, the number of added games with the probability of “57864/65536” As a result, the “0” game is determined. In this case, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is not added.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the program start process is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S1 ends, the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Here, the “checksum” is a kind of code for detecting an error. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch is turned on by turning a predetermined angle while a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. Therefore, in step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the key is inserted into the keyhole. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S3). = No), the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the door opening sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, the door opening sensor 41s is turned on. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened at a predetermined angle or more. I do. If it is determined that the door opening sensor is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S8, and if it is determined that the door opening sensor is OFF (step S4 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 sets a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes) and the door opening sensor 41s is OFF (step S4 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. Regardless, it is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S5 ends, the process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a power interruption recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the saved register value and the saved stack pointer value when power supply is started after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Perform processing to restore. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process of initializing a predetermined area of the main RAM 303 in the power interruption recovery process. Then, when the process of step S6 ends, the process proceeds to step S7.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a power-on command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the power-on command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the power-on command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “power-on command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is powered on. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to a main loop process (see FIG. 38).

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation start command. Specifically, when the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes) and the door opening sensor 41s is ON (step S4 = Yes), the main CPU 301 issues a setting change device operation start command. In order to transmit to the control board 400, the setting change device operation start command is set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the “setting change device operation start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the game machine 1 is turned on and starts setting change. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value and determines whether or not the set value range is normal. Here, when the determination result is normal, a process of displaying the current set value on the stored number display 25 or the setting display unit 36 is performed. On the other hand, if the above determination result is not normal, the initial set value of the set value is set in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then the set value is displayed in the stored number display 25 or the setting display unit 36. Processing to display the initial value of. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching display process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw, and the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The setting value is determined based on the setting value, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 based on the detection that the setting change key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. To store in the set value storage area provided in the. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a stored number display / acquired number display LED lighting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 has a predetermined number for displaying the stored number and the paid-out number on the stored number display unit 25 connected to the relay board 200 via the I / F circuit 305 and the paid-out number display unit 27. Send a command. Then, when the process of step S10 ends, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change device operation end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the setting change device operation end command to the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change device operation end command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set to. Here, the “setting change device operation end command” is a command having information that the setting value has been changed and information relating to the setting value after the change. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to a main loop process (see FIG. 38).

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stack pointer and initializing the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the payout number and processing for setting the current gaming state. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs an overflow display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 pays out via the relay board 200 based on the fact that the auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530s detects that the medal stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530 is full. A process of displaying a predetermined error by the number display 27 is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined error display is performed on the payout number display 27, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display may be performed using another display device or a lamp, or notification may be performed by a plurality of devices such as the payout number display device 27 and the liquid crystal display device 46, for example.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a medal acceptance start process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting the reception of medals when the re-game is not operating. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of reading the value of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a medal insertion check process and the like. Then, when the process of step S106 ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning area by lottery. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to execute the spinning effect based on the winning area determined in step S109. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum one game time. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating reel 17 and the like. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for rotating the reel 17 at a constant speed by driving the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the operable state flag in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the operable state flag storage area is provided corresponding to each of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. The operable state flag is used to determine whether or not the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be stopped. For example, the main CPU 301 determines that all the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be stopped when all the operation enable state flags corresponding to the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are ON. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 17 based on the fact that the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. . Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a stop request. Specifically, the main CPU 301 detects whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation performed on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player, and determines whether or not the rotating reel 17 is stopped. Do. If it is determined that there is a stop request (step S115 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116. If it is determined that there is no stop request (step S115 = No), the process proceeds to step S117. To migrate.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel stop command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel stop command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the reel stop command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the “reel stop command” is information relating to the type of the reel 17 that has been stopped, and the symbol position when the stop switch 11sw, 12sw, 13sw detects a stop operation on the stop button 11, 12, 13 by the player. And a command having information on a symbol code corresponding to the symbol position. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have been stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all the reels 17 are stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that all reels have been stopped (step S117 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118, and if it is determined that all reels have not been stopped (step S117 = No). Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the same process is repeatedly executed until all reels are stopped.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are being operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an OFF edge of the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw is detected. If it is determined that the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are being operated (step S118 = Yes), the process of step S118 is repeatedly executed until the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are not being operated. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are not being operated (step S118 = No), the process proceeds to step S119.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing such as paying out medals by driving the hopper 520 through the power supply substrate 500. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S101 and is repeated.

(Medal reception start processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the medal acceptance start process performed by the process of step S104 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 51 shows a subroutine for medal acceptance start processing.

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a re-game operation. Specifically, based on the value of the re-game in-operation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the main CPU 301 determines whether the combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed on the active line in the previous game. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S104-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-3, and if it is determined that the re-game operation is not being performed (step S104). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for permitting medal insertion acceptance. Specifically, since the main CPU 301 determines in step S104-1 that the replay is not operating (step S104-1 = No), the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting medal insertion acceptance to the medal insertion slot 6. When the process of step S104-2 is completed, the medal acceptance process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic charging standby time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 automatically inserts medals used in the previous game because the combination of symbols related to the re-game is displayed on the active line in the previous game (step S104-1 = Yes). Process to set the time to do. Then, when the process of step S104-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S <b> 104-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is in an automatic charging standby state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the automatic charging standby time set in the process of step S104-3 has elapsed. If it is determined that the automatic charging standby time is set (step S104-4 = Yes), the process of step S104-4 is repeatedly executed until the automatic charging standby time elapses. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the automatic charging standby time (step S104-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-5.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the re-game display lamp is lit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the re-game display lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, so that the re-game display lamp 29 is on. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. If it is determined that the re-game display lamp is lit (step S104-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-8, and it is determined that the re-game display lamp is not lit. (Step S104-5 = No), the process proceeds to Step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an automatic medal insertion command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the medal automatic insertion command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the automatic medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. Here, the medal automatic insertion command is a command having information indicating that a medal used in the previous game is automatically inserted. Then, when the process of step S104-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-7.

(Step S104-7)
In step S104-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game display lamp lighting flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on a re-game display lamp lighting flag in a lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-8.

(Step S104-8)
In step S104-8, the main CPU 301 performs medal insertion number counter addition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal insertion number counter of the main RAM 303 with the upper limit being the number of medals used in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S104-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-9.

(Step S104-9)
In step S104-9, the main CPU 301 performs BET lamp display data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating lighting data for the BET lamp 24 and turning on the BET lamp lighting flag in the lamp-related data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-10.

(Step S104-10)
In step S104-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the combination of symbols related to replay on the active line, and adds “1” to the value of the medal insertion number counter in the process of step S104-8, so that the main RAM 303 is inserted. It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3” (step S104-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104-11, and the value of the medal insertion number counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not (step S104-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-12.

(Step S104-11)
In step S104-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the replay medal limit flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the replay medal limit flag in the medal limit flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S104-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S104-12.

(Step S104-12)
In step S104-12, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the medal is a limit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the data in the medal limit flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether or not the replay medal limit flag is turned ON in the process of step S104-11. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the medal is the limit (step S104-12 = Yes), the medal acceptance start process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S105 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal is not the limit (step S104-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S104-4, and the same process is repeated until the medal limit flag is turned ON.

(Medal management process)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the medal management process performed by the process of step S106 in FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of medal management processing.

(Step S106-1)
In step S <b> 106-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is a re-game operation. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S106-1 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the re-game operation (step S106-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-2.

(Step S106-2)
In step S106-2, the main CPU 301 performs medal insertion check processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first performs a process of determining whether or not an appropriate medal has been inserted by the medal sensor 16s. Next, when an appropriate medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16s, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. In addition, when the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3” and the appropriate medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16s, the main CPU 301 is the maximum value of the number of medals that can be stored in the gaming machine 1. A process of adding “1” to the value of the medal stored number counter in the main RAM 303 is performed up to 50 ”. Further, when a normal medal is inserted by the medal sensor 16 s, the main CPU 301 stores the medal insertion command in the transmission data for effect in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the medal insertion command to the sub-control board 400. Perform processing to set the area. Here, the medal insertion command is a command having information indicating that an appropriate medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Then, when the process of step S106-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-3.

(Step S106-3)
In step S <b> 106-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a BET button operation can be accepted. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the 1 BET button operable flag and the MAX-BET button operable flag in the operation unit acceptance permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are ON. , A process of determining whether or not the BET buttons 7 and 8 are operable is performed. If it is determined that the BET button operation can be accepted (step S106-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-4, and if it is determined that the BET button operation cannot be accepted. (Step S106-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S106-9.

(Step S106-4)
In step S106-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the 1BET button has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw. If it is determined that the 1BET button has been operated (step S106-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-5, and if it is determined that the 1BET button has not been operated (step S106). -4 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-7.

(Step S106-5)
In step S106-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-6.

(Step S106-6)
In step S106-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-7.

(Step S106-7)
In step S106-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the MAX-BET button has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw. If it is determined that the MAX-BET button has been operated (step S106-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-8, and if it is determined that the MAX-BET button has not been operated. (Step S106-7 = No), the process proceeds to Step S106-9.

(Step S106-8)
In step S106-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the medal insertion request counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-9.

(Step S106-9)
In step S106-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal insertion request counter in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3” (step S106-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-11, and the value of the medal insertion request counter is “3”. If it is determined that it is not (step S106-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-10.

(Step S106-10)
In step S106-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal stored number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal stored number counter in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the medal stored number counter is “1” or more (step S106-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-11, and the value of the medal stored number counter is “1”. If it is determined that it is not greater than or equal to “No” (step S106-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-2.

(Step S106-11)
In step S106-11, the main CPU 301 performs a stored game medal insertion process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the medals provided in the main RAM 303 based on the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the medal insertion request counter provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to set the value of the input number counter is performed. Then, when the process of step S106-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-12.

(Step S106-12)
In step S106-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the settlement button 9 has been operated by the settlement switch 9sw. If it is determined that the settlement switch is OFF (step S106-12 = Yes), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 in the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the settlement switch is not OFF (step S106-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S106-13.

(Step S106-13)
In step S106-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S106-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-14.

(Step S106-14)
In step S106-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a medal settlement. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw when the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. Process. If it is determined that the medal has been settled (step S106-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-15, and if it is determined that the medal has not been settled (step S106-14). = No), the medal management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Step S106-15)
In step S106-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal settlement command. Specifically, when it is determined in step S106-14 that there is a medal settlement (step S106-14 = Yes), the main CPU 301 sends the medal settlement command to the sub control board 400 in order to transmit the medal settlement command. Processing for setting the settlement command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal settlement command is a command having information that the medal has been settled by the player. Then, when the process of step S106-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-16.

(Step S106-16)
In step S106-16, the main CPU 301 performs medal settlement processing. Specifically, after paying out “1” medals by the hopper 520, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the medal stored number counter in the main RAM 303, and the medal stored number counter value becomes “0”. Until the medals are paid out, the medal stored in the gaming machine 1 is settled. When the process of step S106-16 ends, the medal management process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S <b> 107-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the operation of the start lever can be accepted. Here, in the present embodiment, when the value of the medal insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, the operation of the start lever can be accepted. If it is determined that the operation of the start lever can be accepted (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and it is determined that the operation of the start lever cannot be accepted. (Step S107-1 = No), the process proceeds to Step S107-5.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-4. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107- 3 = No), the start lever check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the re-game in-operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the start lever reception permission flag in the operation unit reception permission flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-5 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S108 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of internal lottery processing.

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting a random number value generated by the random number generator 304. Here, when the main CPU 301 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generator 304, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing it in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-2.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S108-3.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of lotteries based on the gaming state acquired by the process of step S108-2. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 obtains “35” as the number of lotteries regardless of the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and is provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the lottery count storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S108-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value in the winning area corresponding to the current number of lotteries. For example, when the setting value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “35”, the lottery value “64” related to “strong chance” is acquired. When the set value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “34”, the lottery value “100” related to “medium chance” is acquired. Then, when the process of step S108-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-5.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 301 performs calculation update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 corresponds to the current number of lotteries acquired by the processing of step S108-4 from the random number value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process of subtracting the lottery value of the winning area to be performed is performed, and the process of updating the value of the random number stored in the winning area determining random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the value obtained by the subtraction is performed. . Then, when the process of step S108-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-6.

(Step S108-6)
In step S <b> 108-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is a negative value. And when it determines with having been won (step S108-6 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S108-7. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S108-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-8.

(Step S108-7)
In step S108-7, the main CPU 301 performs data storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the winning area determined to be won by the process of step S108-6 in a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S108-7 ends, the internal lottery process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process.

(Step S108-8)
In step S108-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S108-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S108-9.

(Step S108-9)
In step S108-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S108-8, and as a result, the value of the lottery count storage area is A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S108-9 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S109 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0” (step S108-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S108-4.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of lotteries becomes “0” (step S108-9 = YES), “losing” of “00” is determined as the winning area.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of acquiring a winning area. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a soft random number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a random number value for performing lottery of the spinning effect in the process of step S109-3 described later. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

  In this embodiment, when determining the spinning effect, a software random number is used to obtain a numerical value within a certain range by using a counter on the software. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a hard random number from the random number generator 304 may be acquired.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect production lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains the winning area acquired by the process of step S109-1, the information relating to the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the spinning effect table ( 23), a spinning effect that can be determined by lottery is selected. Next, the main CPU 301 executes the rotation effect based on the rotation effect lottery table (see FIG. 24) corresponding to the selected rotation effect and the soft random number acquired by the process of step S109-2. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a lottery effect lottery has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery result in the spinning effect lottery process in step S109-3 has been won. If it is determined that the lottery for the spinning effect has been won (step S109-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-5, and it is determined that the lottery for the rotating effect has not been won. In this case (step S109-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-5)
In step S <b> 109-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the corresponding turning effect 01 to 04 flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the rotation effect 01 flag to the rotation effect 04 in the rotation effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the lottery result of the rotation effect lottery process in step S109-3. Processing to turn on the flag flag is performed. Here, the rotation effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 includes a rotation effect 01 flag storage area, a rotation effect 02-01 flag storage area, a rotation effect 02-02 flag storage area, and a rotation effect 02. A −03 flag storage area, a rotation effect 03 flag storage area, and a rotation effect 04 flag storage area are provided. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring information relating to the gaming state based on data stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display permission symbol bit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the display permission symbol storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the flag data stored in the flag data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect 01 flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the turning effect 01 flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the spinning effect 01 flag is ON (step S109-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-9, and it is determined that the spinning effect 01 flag is not ON. (Step S109-8 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-10.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a waiting time setting process for the spinning effect 01. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time corresponding to the spinning effect 01 in the timer counter. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start acceptance command is a command having information indicating that the start of rotation of the reel 17 has been accepted. When the process of step S109-10 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 56 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a minimum one game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S110-2 described later has become “0” in the previous game. When it is determined that the minimum one game time has elapsed (step S110-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2, and when it is determined that the minimum one game time has not elapsed. (Step S110-1 = No), the process of step S110-1 is repeatedly executed until the minimum one game time elapses.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a minimum one game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 does not spend less than the minimum one game time from the process of step S110-2 in the previous game to the process of step S110-1 in the current game in order to suppress gambling for the game. As described above, a process of setting the minimum one game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum one game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S <b> 110-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the rotation effect is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not any of the turning effect flag among the turning effect 01 flag to the turning effect 04 flag flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. To determine whether or not. If it is determined that the rotation effect is being executed (step S110-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-4. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not being executed ( Step S110-3 = No) and the process proceeds to step S110-5.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect 01 flag to the turning effect 04 flag flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether only the rotation effect flag corresponding to the rotation effect that is performed during the reel rotation start preparation process is ON. As a result, it is not necessary to check all the spinning effect flags.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the spinning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the rendering block table (see FIGS. 25 to 26), the rendering phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the spinning cylinder. Based on the performance execution table (see FIGS. 30 to 31), processing for executing the spinning performance is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time until the rotation speed of the reel 17 reaches a constant speed. Then, when the process of step S110-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-6.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that the rotation of the reel 17 is started. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of rotating reels. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the left reel rotation flag, the middle reel rotation flag, and the right reel rotation flag in the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-7 ends, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Rotation effect setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 57, the spinning effect setting process performed by the process of step S111-4 of FIG. 56 will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the spinning drum effect setting process.

(Step S111-4-1)
In step S <b> 111-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 58. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for executing the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-2.

(Step S111-4-2)
In step S111-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning effect to be executed is the spinning effect 02. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect 02 flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the spinning effect to be executed is the spinning effect 02 (step S111-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3, and the spinning effect to be executed is determined. If it is determined that the rotation effect is not 02 (step S111-4-2 = No), the rotation effect setting processing subroutine is terminated.

(Step S111-4-3)
In step S111-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a temporary timer. Specifically, the operation of the start lever 10 is requested during the rotation effect 02, and the continuation of the rotation effect 02 is executed based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10. Therefore, the main CPU 301 continues the rotation effect 02 even when the start lever 10 is not operated for a predetermined time after the start lever 10 is requested during the rotation effect 02. Is performed, the temporary timer value is set in a temporary timer value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value of the temporary timer can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-4.

(Step S111-4-4)
In step S111-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start lever 10 has been operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. If it is determined that the start lever 10 has been operated (step S111-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-5, and it is determined that the start lever 10 has not been operated. In this case (step S111-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-6.

(Step S111-4-5)
In step S111-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the temporary timer set in the process of step S111-4-3 to “0”. Then, when the process of step S111-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-6.

(Step S111-4-6)
In step S111-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer has become “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 has become “0”. If it is determined that the value of the temporary timer has become “0” (step S111-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-7, and the value of the temporary timer is “0”. If it is determined that it is not (step S111-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-4, and step S111-4 is continued until the value of the temporary timer becomes “0”. -4 to step S111-4-6 are repeatedly executed.

(Step S111-4-7)
In step S <b> 111-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the turning effect 02-02 or the turning effect 02-03. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the information related to the turning effect 02-02 or the turning effect 02-03 is stored based on the value of the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with it being the rotation effect 02-02 or the rotation effect 02-03 (step S111-4-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-4-8, and a rotation effect If it is determined that it is not 02-02 or the reeling effect 02-03 (step S111-4-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-9.

(Step S111-4-8)
In step S111-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a rotating effect correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a control of rotating the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the reverse direction by performing a process of adding “7” to the data corresponding to the rotation direction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-9.

(Step S111-4-9)
In step S111-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the rotation effect command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the rotation effect command to the sub-control board 400. Here, the spinning effect command is a command having information related to the type of the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S111-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-10.

(Step S111-4-10)
In step S111-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a wait timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a timer value in the wait timer storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-11.

(Step S111-4-11)
In step S111-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a timer wait process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets a temporary timer value and performs a process of waiting until the temporary timer value becomes “0”. When the process of step S111-4-11 ends, the spinning effect setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Cylinder effect processing)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the spinning effect processing performed by the processing of step S111-4-1 in FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the spinning effect processing.

(Step S111-4-1-1)
In step S111-4-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the spinning effect table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a spinning effect table (see FIG. 23). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-2.

(Step S111-4-1-2)
In step S111-4-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding a register value corresponding to the rotation effect table (see FIG. 23). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-3.

(Step S111-4-1-3)
In step S111-4-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring effect block data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects among the effect block table 1 to the effect block table 9 (see FIGS. 25 to 26) based on the register value updated by the process of step S111-4-1-2. Any one effect block table is acquired, and the process of acquiring the effect block data is performed based on the acquired effect block table and the register value. At this time, processing for setting the initial address of the selected effect block table is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-4.

(Step S111-4-1-4)
In step S111-4-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the effect block end flag storage area is “1”. And when it determines with it being the time of completion | finish of a rotation effect (step S111-4-1-4 = Yes), a rotation effect process is complete | finished and step S111-4-2 of a rotation effect setting process is completed. If it is determined that it is not at the end of the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-5.

(Step S111-4-1-5)
In step S111-4-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the production cylinder and the rotation direction. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting the production cylinder and the rotation direction based on the production block data updated by the process in step S111-4-1-3. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-6.

(Step S111-4-1-6)
In step S111-4-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not correction is being performed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the correction flag is ON based on the effect block data acquired in step S111-4-1-3. If it is determined that correction is being performed (step S111-4-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-7, and if it is determined that correction is not being performed. (Step S111-4-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to Step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-7)
In step S111-4-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs an effect press order acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 detected by the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw in the previous game. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8.

(Step S111-4-1-8)
In step S111-4-1-8, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction update process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the reel rotation direction by correction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-9)
In step S111-4-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value of the effect phase table defined in the effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-10.

(Step S111-4-1-10)
In step S111-4-1-10, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding register values corresponding to the effect block tables (see FIGS. 25 to 26). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-11.

(Step S111-4-1-11)
In step S111-4-1-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs an effect phase execution count acquisition process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the number of executions, a process for obtaining a correction flag, and the like based on the effect phase table 1 to the effect phase table 31 (see FIGS. 27 to 29). And if the process of step S111-4-1-11 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-12.

(Step S111-4-1-12)
In step S111-4-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter correction process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for correcting the pulse counter and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-13.

(Step S111-4-1-13)
In step S111-4-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring an offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the offset value of the spinning drum effect execution table defined in the effect phase table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-14.

(Step S111-4-1-14)
In step S111-4-1-14, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding register values corresponding to the effect phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29). Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15)
In step S111-4-1-15, the main CPU 301 performs excitation image setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pulse counter and the like. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-16.

(Step S111-4-1-16)
In step S111-4-1-16, the main CPU 301 performs an excitation execution number confirmation process described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for exciting the motor phases of the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-17.

(Step S111-4-1-17)
In step S111-4-1-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process related to the currently set effect phase data has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process related to the effect phase data acquired by the process of step S111-4-1-14 has ended. And when it determines with the process concerning production | presentation phase data having been complete | finished (step S111-4-1-17 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-4-1-18, and relates to production phase data. If it is determined that the process has not ended (step S111-4-1-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15.

(Step S111-4-1-18)
In step S111-4-1-18, the main CPU 301 performs effect phase execution frequency subtraction processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the effect phase execution number counter provided in the sub RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-19.

(Step S111-4-1-19)
In step S111-4-1-19, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of performance phase executions is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the effect phase execution number counter by the effect phase execution number subtraction process in step S111-4-1-18, and as a result, the value of the effect phase execution number counter becomes “0”. Is performed to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value of the production phase execution count counter is “0” (step S111-4-1-19 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-20. If it is determined that the value of the phase execution number counter is not “0” (step S111-4-1-19 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12.

(Step S111-4-1-20)
In step S111-4-1-20, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the phase group has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the processing related to the effect phase data specified in the selected effect phase table has been completed based on the value of the phase counter data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the phase group has ended (step S111-4-1-20 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-21, and it is determined that the phase group has not ended. If it is determined (step S111-4-1-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9.

(Step S111-4-1-21)
In step S111-4-1-21, the main CPU 301 performs a process of moving to a block execution flag address. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift to the block execution flag address of the selected effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-3.

(Rotation direction update process)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the rotation direction update process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-8 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 59 shows a subroutine for the rotation direction updating process.

(Step S111-4-1-8-1)
In step S111-4-1-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation direction is being corrected. Specifically, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the main CPU 301 determines the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4, and the operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player is the middle stop button 12, right stop. In order to correct the rotation direction of the reel 17 when operated in the order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the BAR matching replay 03 during RT4 is determined, and the stop button by the player A process of determining whether or not the operation order of 11, 12, and 13 has been operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11 is performed. If it is determined that the rotation direction is being corrected (step S111-4-1-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-4, and the rotation direction is being corrected. If it is determined that it is not (step S111-4-1-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-2.

(Step S111-4-1-8-2)
In step S111-4-1-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of confirming the target reel for the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control for confirming the target reel for the spinning effect based on the selected effect block data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-3.

(Step S111-4-1-8-3)
In step S111-4-1-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the rotation direction is being corrected. Specifically, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, the main CPU 301 corrects the rotation direction of the reel 17 when the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4 is determined and the right stop button 13 is first operated by the player. Therefore, in the internal lottery process in the previous game, a process of determining whether or not the BAR matching replay 01 during RT4 is determined and the right stop button 13 is first operated by the player is performed. If it is determined that the rotational direction is being corrected (step S111-4-1-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-8-4, and the rotational direction is being corrected. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-8-3 = No), the rotation direction update process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-9 of the turning effect process. .

(Step S111-4-1-8-4)
In step S111-4-1-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs control to correct the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the spinning effect and update the correction result. And when the process of step 111-4-1-8-4 is complete | finished, a rotation direction update process is complete | finished and a process transfers to step S111-4-1-9 of a rotation effect production process.

(Direction phase execution count acquisition process)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the effect phase execution count acquisition process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-11 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect phase execution frequency acquisition processing.

(Step S111-4-1-11-1)
In step S111-4-1-11-1, the main CPU 301 performs an execution times acquisition process. Specifically, main CPU301 performs the process which acquires the data corresponding to the frequency | count of execution from the production phase data acquired by the production phase table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-11-2.

(Step S111-4-1-11-2)
In step S <b> 111-4-11-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the execution count data is “2” bytes. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the data related to the number of executions acquired in the process of step S111-4-1-11-1 is “2” bytes. If it is determined that the number of executions is “2” bytes data (step S111-4-1-11-2 = Yes), the effect phase execution number acquisition process is terminated, and the rotation effect process is completed. If the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12 and it is determined that the number of executions is not “2” bytes data (step S111-4-1-11-2 = No), step S111- The process proceeds to 4-1-11-3.

(Step S111-4-1-11-3)
In step S111-4-1-1-11-3, the main CPU 301 performs an execution number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring data on the number of executions of “2” bytes from the effect phase data defined in the effect phase table. And if the process of step S111-4-1-11-3 is complete | finished, an effect phase execution frequency acquisition process will be complete | finished, and a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-12.

(Pulse counter correction processing)
Next, based on FIG. 61, the pulse counter correction process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-12 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 61 shows a subroutine of the pulse counter correction process.

(Step S111-4-1-12-1)
In step S111-4-1-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during pulse counter correction. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is necessary to correct the pulse power necessary for starting the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. If it is determined that the pulse counter is being corrected (step S111-4-1-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-2, and the pulse counter is being corrected. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-8.

(Step S111-4-1-12-2)
In step S111-4-1-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel for a spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring data corresponding to the movable reel among the effect block data defined in the effect block table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-3.

(Step S111-4-1-12-3)
In step S111-4-1-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” in a loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value of the loop counter is defined in order to check all the reels 17 provided in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, “4” is set as the value of the loop counter. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-4)
In step S111-4-1-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value in the loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-5.

(Step S111-4-1-12-5)
In step S111-4-1-12-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the loop counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S111-4-1-12-4. To determine whether or not the value of the loop counter storage area provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is “0” (step S111-4-1-12-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-8. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is not “0” (step S111-4-1-12-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-6.

(Step S111-4-1-12-6)
In step S111-4-1-12-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is a target reel of the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a logical product operation of the reel corresponding to the rotation effect set in the process of step S111-4-1-12-2 and the data corresponding to the loop counter, thereby performing the rotation. A process of determining whether or not the reel is a production target reel is performed. If it is determined that the reel is the target reel for the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-12-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-7, where If it is determined that the reel is not the production target reel (step S111-4-1-12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-7)
In step S111-4-1-12-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for correcting the pulse counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting pulse counters corresponding to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 corresponding to the reels targeted for the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-12-4.

(Step S111-4-1-12-8)
In step S111-4-1-12-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the phase counter data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the value of the phase counter data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to acquire the next effect phase data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-12-8 is completed, the pulse counter correction process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-13 of the spinning drum effect process.

(Excitation image setting processing)
Next, the excitation image setting process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-15 in FIG. 58 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 62 shows a subroutine for excitation image setting processing.

(Step S111-4-1-15-1)
In step S111-4-1-15-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pulse counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a pulse counter in order to acquire data related to any pulse data among the positions (a) to (h) in the pulse data table (see FIG. 32). Do. And if the process of step S111-4-1-15-1 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S111-4-1-15-2.

(Step S111-4-1-15-2)
In step S <b> 111-4-15-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel for a spinning effect and a search reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining data relating to the movable reel among the currently set effect block data, and searches for one of the reels 17 as a search reel. Processing to set as a reel is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-3.

(Step S111-4-1-15-3)
In step S <b> 111-4-15-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is a subject for the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs an AND operation on the data related to the search reel set by the processing in step S111-4-1-15-2 and the data related to the reel effect target reel. Then, a process for determining whether or not the reel effect target reel is performed. If it is determined that the reel is the target reel for the spinning effect (step S111-4-1-15-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-4, where If it is determined that the reel is not a production target reel (step S111-4-1-15-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-16.

(Step S111-4-1-15-4)
In step S111-4-1-15-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the added value of the pulse counter. Specifically, main CPU301 performs the process which sets the data corresponding to a rotation direction among rotation effect execution execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-5.

(Step S111-4-1-15-5)
In step S111-4-1-15-5, the main CPU 301 performs a production target reel rotation direction confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming data relating to the current rotation direction of the reel 17. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-6.

(Step S111-4-1-15-6)
In step S111-4-1-15-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to correct the rotation direction of the production target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the data corresponding to the rotation direction to the data confirmed in the rotation direction by the processing in step S111-4-15-15-5, and as a result, corrects the rotation direction of the production target reel. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. And when it determines with it being at the time of correction | amendment of the rotation direction of an effect object reel (step S111-4-1-15-6 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S111-4-1-15-7. If it is determined that the rotation direction of the production target reel is not corrected (step S111-4-1-15-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-8.

(Step S111-4-1-15-7)
In step S111-4-1-15-7, the main CPU 301 performs a rotation direction correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data in the reverse direction when data in the forward direction is set as data related to the current rotation direction of the reel 17 during the spinning effect. Do. On the other hand, when the data relating to the reverse direction is set as the data relating to the current rotation direction of the reel 17 during the spinning effect, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the data relating to the forward direction. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-8.

(Step S111-4-1-15-8)
In step S111-4-1-15-8, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the rotation direction of the reel 17 confirmed by the process in step S111-4-1-15-5 or the rotation direction corrected by the process in step S111-4-1-15-7. To update the excitation pulse counter. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-9.

(Step S111-4-1-15-9)
In step S111-4-1-15-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a four-phase OFF flag value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the four-phase OFF flag of the current spinning effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-10.

(Step S111-4-1-15-10)
In step S111-4-1-15-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the four-phase is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the data related to the four-phase OFF flag set by the process of step S111-4-1-15-9 is ON. If it is determined that the four-phase is OFF (step S111-4-1-15-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-11 and the four-phase is OFF. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-4-1-15-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15-11)
In step S111-4-1-15-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an excitation pattern when the four phases are OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse data when the four phases are OFF. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-12.

(Step S111-4-1-15-12)
In step S111-4-1-15-12, the main CPU 301 performs an offset value correction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of correcting the offset value related to the spinning drum effect execution table. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-13.

(Step S111-4-1-15-13)
In step S111-4-1-15-13, the main CPU 301 performs a register addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding a register value related to the rotation effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-14.

(Step S111-4-1-15-14)
In step S111-4-1-15-14, the main CPU 301 performs output excitation pattern storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing an excitation pattern when the four phases are OFF. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-15.

(Step S111-4-1-15-15)
In step S111-4-1-15-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an output excitation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse data to be supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-16.

(Step S111-4-1-15-16)
In step S111-4-1-15-16, the main CPU 301 performs a pulse counter update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the output excitation pattern of the current search reel by the processing of step S111-4-15-15-15, so the value of the pulse counter corresponding to the next search reel is set. Is set in the register. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-17.

(Step S111-4-1-15-17)
In step S111-4-1-15-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting pulse signal output data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting pulse signal output data based on the output excitation pattern set by the process of step S111-4-1-15-15. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-15-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-18.

(Step S111-4-1-15-18)
In step S111-4-1-15-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not pulse signal output data has been set for the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 of the reel 17. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S111-4-1-15-18 = Yes), the excitation image setting process is ended and step S111-4-1 of the spinning effect processing is performed. When the process is shifted to -16 and it is determined that the processing of all the reels is not completed (step S111-4-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-15-2. Transition.

(Excitation execution frequency confirmation process)
Next, based on FIG. 63, the excitation execution number confirmation process performed by the process of step S111-4-1-16 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine for excitation execution number confirmation processing.

(Step S111-4-1-16-1)
In step S111-4-1-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs excitation execution number setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of times of excitation holding based on the current spinning effect execution data. Then, when the process of step S111-4-1-16-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-1-16-2.

(Step S111-4-1-16-2)
In step S111-4-1-16-2, the main CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the excitation has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not excitation for the number of times of excitation holding set by the process of step S111-4-1-16-1 has been completed. If it is determined that the excitation has been completed (step S111-4-1-16-2 = Yes), the excitation execution number confirmation process is terminated, and step S111-4-1 in the spinning effect process. When the process is shifted to -17 and it is determined that the excitation has not been completed (step S111-4-1-16-2 = No), step S111-4- is continued until the excitation is completed. The processing of 1-16-2 is repeatedly executed.

(Timer wait processing)
Next, based on FIG. 64, the timer waiting process performed by the process of step S111-4-10 in FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine for timer waiting processing.

(Step S111-4-10-1)
In step S111-4-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a temporary timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the RAM 303 as the value of the temporary timer. Then, when the process of step S111-4-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-10-2.

(Step S111-4-10-2)
In step S111-4-10-2, the main CPU 412 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the temporary timer has become “0” as a result of the subtraction of the value of the temporary timer by an interrupt process (see FIG. 77) described later. . When it is determined that the value of the temporary timer is “0” (step S111-4-1-10-2 = Yes), the reel production setting process in step S111-4 of the reel rotation start preparation process is started. When the spinning effect setting process is called, the timer waiting process is terminated, the process proceeds to step S111-5 of the reel rotation start preparation process, and the spinning effect setting is set from step S121-4 of the gaming state transition process. When the process is called, the timer waiting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the temporary timer is not “0” (step S111-4-10-2 = No), step S111-4-10—until the value of the temporary timer becomes “0”. Step 2 is repeatedly executed.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 65, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 65 shows a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” equal to the number of reels 17 as a predicted pull-in reel search initial value in a predicted pull-in reel search count storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a search target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a search target reel with reference to an expected pull-in reel search frequency storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-3.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the reel state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 refers to the reel rotation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and performs a process of acquiring the state of the reel 17 acquired by the process of step S111-2. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the search target reel 17 is rotating based on the search target reel acquired in step S111-2 and the reel status acquired in step S111-3. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S111-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-5, and if it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S111- 4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6.

(Step S111-5)
In step S111-5, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position and performs a process of acquiring the pull-in priority. Next, the main CPU 301 acquires a predicted pull-in reel, sets a predicted pull-in data address, and confirms the stop position. Next, if the stop position is not “00”, the main CPU 301 corrects the stop position and stores the drawing priority order in the drawing priority order storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the virtual stop position and determines whether or not the search is completed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the pull-in priority order and storing the pull-in priority order in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 until the search is completed. Then, when the process of step S111-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6.

(Step S111-6)
In step S111-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the search target reel is stopped in the process of step S111-4 (step S111-4 = No) or in the process of step S111-5. When the pull-in prediction process is completed, a process for acquiring the next deposit target reel is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S111-7)
In step S111-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all the reels 17 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S111-7 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S111-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-2, and the same processing is performed until all reels have been processed. Repeatedly.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 66, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S114 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation processing.

(Step S114-1)
In step S <b> 114-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the stop button is pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw have detected the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S114-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114-2. If it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S114). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S115 of the main loop process.

(Step S114-2)
In step S114-2, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing reference position acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the pressing reference position based on the target reel 17 and the counter value of the pulses supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, and is provided in the main RAM 303. A process of storing in the pressing reference position storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S114-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-3.

(Step S114-3)
In step S114-3, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like. To obtain the number of sliding frames. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S114-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-4.

(Step S114-4)
In step S114-4, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of stopping the control reel based on the pressing reference position acquired by the process of step S114-2 and the number of sliding symbols acquired by the process of step S114-3. When the process of step S114-4 is completed, the subroutine of the reel rotation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S115 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 67, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 50 is demonstrated. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs display determination abnormality detection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the symbols displayed on the effective line based on the data in the display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the data in the flag data storage area provided in the main RAM 303. It is determined whether or not the combination is abnormal. Here, the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303 is an area for storing data relating to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not display determination is abnormal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an abnormality has been detected by the display determination abnormality detection process in step S119-1. If it is determined that the display determination is abnormal (step S119-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-3. If it is determined that the display determination is not abnormal (step S119-2). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an illegal winning error. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on an illegal winning error flag in the abnormality detection flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs non-recoverable error processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the result of the process of step S119-1 is abnormal in the process of step S119-2 (step S119-2 = Yes). Since the combination of symbols that has not been displayed is displayed on the active line, an unrecoverable error process is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-4 ends, the main CPU 301 ends the process without returning to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay display is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay is displayed based on data stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the regame display is being performed (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and if it is determined that the regame display is not being performed (step S119). -5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a re-game operation command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a re-game operation command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the re-game operation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the re-game operation command is a command having information indicating that a combination of symbols related to re-game is displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-7.

(Step S119-7)
In step S119-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game in-operation flag in the re-game in-operation flag storage area of the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-7 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-8)
In step S119-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the winning symbol is displayed (step S119-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-9, and if it is determined that the winning symbol is not displayed (step S119). −8 = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-9)
In step S119-9, the main CPU 301 performs an effective line number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of effective lines of the gaming machine 1. Here, in this embodiment, since the effective line is only the right-downward line, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “1” as the number of effective lines. Then, when the process of step S119-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10.

  In the present embodiment, the number of effective lines is “1” because the effective lines are only right-down lines. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and a plurality of effective lines can be set.

(Step S119-10)
In step S119-10, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the data stored in the display combination storing area and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 14). Then, when the process of step S119-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-11.

(Step S119-11)
In step S119-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the process for the number of valid lines has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the payout number has been calculated by the payout number calculation process in step S119-10 for the number of effective lines acquired in the effective line number acquisition process in step S119-9. Do. And when it determines with the process for the number of effective lines having been complete | finished (step S119-11 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S119-12, and determines with the process for the number of effective lines not having been completed. If it is determined (step S119-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-9, and the same process is repeatedly executed until the process for the number of valid lines is completed.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of effective lines is “1”, it is not determined that the processing for the number of effective lines has not been completed (step S119-11 = No).

(Step S119-12)
In step S119-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for confirming the payout number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the maximum payout number per game has been exceeded. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum payout number per game is “9”. When the process of step S119-12 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Payment processing)
Next, the payout process performed by the process of step S120 of FIG. 50 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 68 shows a subroutine for payout processing.

(Step S120-1)
In step S120-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a re-game operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (step S120-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-3, and if it is determined that the re-game operation is not being performed (step S120). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-2.

(Step S120-2)
In step S120-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the number of payouts. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the payout number calculated in the payout number calculation process of step S119-10 in a medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-3.

(Step S120-3)
In step S120-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a payout medal. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a payout medal based on the value of the medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that there is a payout medal (step S120-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-4, and when it is determined that there is no payout medal (step S120-3 = No). ), The payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Step S120-4)
In step S120-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a medal payout start command to the sub-control board 400, processing for setting the medal payout start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal payout start command is a command having information indicating that the medal payout starts. Then, when the process of step S120-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S120-5.

(Step S120-5)
In step S120-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal storage number is a limit. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal storage number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “50”. Here, when the value of the medal stored number counter is “50”, the main CPU 301 determines that the medal stored number is the limit, and when the value of the medal stored number counter is less than “50”, It is determined that the medal storage number is not the limit. When it is determined that the medal storage number is the limit (step S120-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-7, and when it is determined that the medal storage number is not the limit ( Step S120-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-6.

(Step S120-6)
In step S120-6, the main CPU 301 performs a stored number addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal stored number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and subtracts “1” from the value of the medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S120-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-7)
In step S120-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting payout number data. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the medal payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S120-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-8.

(Step S120-8)
In step S120-8, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls to pay out “1” medals by driving the hopper 520 through the power supply board 500. Then, when the process of step S120-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S120-9.

(Step S120-9)
In step S120-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the medal payout has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the medal payout number counter stored in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the medal payout has ended (step S120-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S120-10, and if it is determined that the medal payout has not ended ( Step S120-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S120-5, and the same process is repeated until the medal payout is completed.

(Step S120-10)
In step S120-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a medal payout end command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a medal payout end command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the medal payout end command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the medal payout end command is a command having information indicating that the medal payout has ended. When the process of step S120-10 is completed, the payout process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 50 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a gaming state command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the gaming state command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the gaming state to the sub-control board 400. Here, the gaming state command is a command having information indicating which gaming state is the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state. Then, when the process of step S121-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-3.

(Step S121-3)
In step S <b> 121-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning drum effect is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not any of the turning effect flag among the turning effect 01 flag to the turning effect 04 flag flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. To determine whether or not. If it is determined that the spinning effect is being performed (step S121-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-4, and if it is determined that the spinning effect is not being performed ( Step S121-3 = No), the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the turning effect 01 flag to the turning effect 04 flag flag in the turning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether only the turning effect flag corresponding to the turning effect that is performed during the game state transition process is ON. As a result, it is not necessary to check all the spinning effect flags, so that the processing burden on the main control board 300 can be reduced.

(Step S121-4)
In step S121-4, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect setting process (see FIG. 57). In this processing, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the spinning effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the rendering block table (see FIGS. 25 to 26), the rendering phase table (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the spinning cylinder. Based on the performance execution table (see FIGS. 30 to 31), processing for executing the spinning performance is performed. When the process of step S121-4 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 70, the RT gaming state transition process performed by the process of step S121-1 of FIG. 69 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1)
In step S121-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-1-2.

(Step S121-1-2)
In step S121-1-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT0 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S121-1-1 is the RT0 gaming state. If it is determined that the player is in the RT0 gaming state (step S121-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-3. If it is determined that the player is not in the RT0 gaming state ( Step S121-1-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-4.

(Step S121-1-3)
In step S121-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT0 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S121-1-3 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-4)
In step S121-1-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S121-1-1 is the RT1 gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the RT1 gaming state (step S121-1-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-5. If it is determined that the game is not in the RT1 gaming state ( Step S121-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-6.

(Step S121-1-5)
In step S121-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT1 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S121-1-5 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-6)
In step S121-1-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S121-1-1 is the RT2 gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the RT2 gaming state (step S121-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7, and if it is determined that the game is not in the RT2 gaming state ( Step S121-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to Step S121-1-8.

(Step S121-1-7)
In step S121-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT2 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S121-1-7 ends, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-8)
In step S121-1-8, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S121-1-1 is the RT3 gaming state. If it is determined that the player is in the RT3 gaming state (step S121-1-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9. If it is determined that the player is not in the RT3 gaming state ( In step S121-1-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-10.

(Step S121-1-9)
In step S121-1-9, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT3 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1-9 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-10)
In step S121-1-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT4 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the gaming state acquired in step S121-1-1 is an RT4 gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the RT4 gaming state (step S121-1-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-1-11. If it is determined that the game is not in the RT4 gaming state ( In step S121-1-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S1211-1-12.

(Step S121-1-11)
In step S121-1-11, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1-11 ends, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-12)
In step S1211-1-12, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state transition process for RT5 gaming state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the game state based on the combination of the current game state and the symbols displayed on the active line. When the process of step S1211-1-12 is completed, the RT gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(RT0 gaming state game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the gaming state transition processing for RT0 gaming state performed by the processing of step S121-1-3 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT0 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-3-1)
In step S121-1-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on data stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S121-1-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-3-3, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In such a case (step S121-1-3-1 = No), the RT0 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-3-2)
In step S121-1-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-3-3 is completed, the RT0 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Game state transition process for RT1 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the game state transition process for RT1 game state performed by the process of step S121-1-5 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-5-1)
In step S121-1-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a preparation replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the preparation replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the preparation replay is displayed (step S121-1-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-5-2, and it is determined that the preparation replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-5-3.

(Step S121-1-5-2)
In step S121-1-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT2 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-5-2 is completed, the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-5-3)
In step S121-1-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed based on the value stored in the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed (step S121-1-5-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-5-4, and the blue 7 replay or follow is displayed. If it is determined that the replay is not displayed (step S121-1-5-3 = No), the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the gaming state transition processing proceeds to step S121-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S121-1-5-4)
In step S121-1-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-5-4 is completed, the RT1 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(RT2 gaming state game state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the gaming state transition processing for RT2 gaming state performed by the processing of step S121-1-7 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT2 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-7-1)
In step S121-1-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S121-1-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S121-1-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7-3.

(Step S121-1-7-2)
In step S121-1-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-7-2 is completed, the RT2 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-7-3)
In step S121-1-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay or follow replay is displayed based on the value stored in the display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed (step S121-1-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7-4, and red is displayed. When it is determined that 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is not displayed (step S121-1-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7-5.

(Step S121-1-7-4)
In step S121-1-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-7-4 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process for RT2 gaming state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-7-5)
In step S121-1-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S121-1-7-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-7-6, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-7-5 = No), the RT2 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-7-6)
In step S121-1-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the processing of step S121-1-7-6 is completed, the RT2 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Game state transition process for RT3 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 74, the gaming state transition processing for RT3 gaming state performed by the processing of step S121-1-9 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT3 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-9-1)
In step S121-1-9-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S121-1-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S121-1-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9-3.

(Step S121-1-9-2)
In step S121-1-9-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S121-1-9-2 is completed, the RT3 gaming state gaming state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-9-3)
In step S121-1-9-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the RT4 transition replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RT4 transition replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the RT4 transition replay is displayed (step S121-1-9-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9-4, and the RT4 transition replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-9-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9-5.

(Step S121-1-9-4)
In step S121-1-9-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT4 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT4 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-9-4 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process for RT3 gaming state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-9-5)
In step S121-1-9-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S121-1-9-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-9-6, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-9-5 = No), the RT3 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-9-6)
In step S121-1-9-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-9-6 is completed, the RT3 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Game state transition process for RT4 game state)
Next, based on FIG. 75, the gaming state transition processing for RT4 gaming state performed by the processing of step S121-1-11 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT4 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1-1-1)
In step S121-1-11-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S121-1-11-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-11-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S121-1-11-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S121-1-11-3.

(Step S121-1-11-2)
In step S121-1-11-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-11-2 is completed, the subroutine of the gaming state transition process for RT4 gaming state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-11-3)
In step S121-1-11-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the RUSH replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S121-1-11-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-11-4, and it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-11-3 = No), the RT4 gaming state game state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-11-4)
In step S121-1-11-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT5 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT5 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-11-4 is completed, the RT4 gaming state gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(RT5 gaming state game state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the gaming state transition processing for RT5 gaming state performed by the processing of step S1211-1-12 of FIG. 70 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT5 gaming state gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-12-1)
In step S121-1-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S1211-1-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-1-12-2, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In such a case (step S1211-1-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S1211-1-12-3.

(Step S121-1-12-2)
In step S1211-1-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S1211-1-12-2 is completed, the RT5 gaming state game state transition processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-12-3)
In step S121-1-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a preparation replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the preparation replay is displayed based on a value stored in a display combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the preparation replay is displayed (step S121-1-12-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S1211-1-12-4, and it is determined that the preparation replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S121-1-12-3 = No), the RT5 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Step S121-1-12-4)
In step S121-1-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT2 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S121-1-12-4 is completed, the RT5 gaming state game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine for interrupt processing.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving signals from the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, and the power supply board 500 through the I / F circuit 305. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the rotation effect time at the time of the rotation effect, the minimum one game time, and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel number in order to set a target of a reel to be driven and controlled in a reel drive control process of step S205 described later. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the reel stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S204 via the reel control board 100, thereby accelerating the reel 17. Perform constant speed, deceleration control, etc. In addition, when executing the spinning effect, control is performed to rotate the rotation direction of the reel 17 in the reverse rotation direction. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S205 has been performed for all the reels of the reel 17. If it is determined that all reels have been completed (step S206 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S207. If it is determined that all reels have not been completed (step S206 = No), step S204 is performed. The process is repeated until the reel drive control process is performed on all reels.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of outputting the data set by the terminal board signal output process in step S123-2 to a terminal board (not shown). Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 23, BET lamps 24 a to 24 c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throw-in possible display lamp 28, and a re-game display lamp 29. Perform light emission control. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG. The main process in the sub control board is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 402 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 402 performs main board communication processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 402 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of outputting sound from the speakers 34 and 35 via the amplifier control board 440 based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 402 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402, based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later, via the effect control board 410, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start The lever effect lamp 42 is controlled. Further, the sub CPU 402 controls the effect device 44 via the effect control board 410 and the drive board 43 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 402 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 410 and the general-purpose board 45 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not various switch detection tasks are activated. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs predetermined processing when (a) the effect button detection switch 18sw detects an operation of the effect button 18, or (b) when the cross key detection switch 19sw detects an operation of the cross key 19. A process for determining whether or not various switch detection tasks for executing the process are activated is performed. If it is determined that the various switch detection task is activated (step S306 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302, and it is determined that the various switch detection task is not activated. (Step S306 = No), the process proceeds to Step S307.

(Step S307)
In step S307, the sub CPU 402 performs task activation processing for detecting various switches. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs predetermined processing when (a) the effect button detection switch 18sw detects an operation of the effect button 18, or (b) when the cross key detection switch 19sw detects an operation of the cross key 19. In order to execute the process, a process of starting various switch detection tasks is performed. Then, when the process of step S307 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 79, the main board | substrate communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 78 is demonstrated. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the previously transmitted command. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, since the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time, the sub CPU 402 is based on a command different from the command transmitted last time. Processing for creating game information and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 405 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 402 performs command analysis processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 79 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs effect content determination processing that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of acquiring the production contents. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU402 performs the process which determines the lamp data corresponding to the production content determined by the process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU402 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the production content determined by the process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU402 performs the process which determines the image data corresponding to the production content determined by the process of step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Production content determination process)
Next, based on FIG. 81, the effect content determination process performed by the process of step S302-3-1 in FIG. 80 will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine of effect content determination processing.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a power-on command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a power-on command. If it is determined that the received command is a power-on command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is a power supply command. If it is determined that the command is not an input command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a power-on command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data at power-on based on a power-on command from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-3-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a setting change command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether a command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a setting change device operation start command or a setting change device operation end command. If it is determined that the received command is a setting change command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is set. If it is determined that the command is not a change command (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a setting change command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the effect data at the time of setting change based on the setting change device operation start command or the setting change device operation end command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Etc. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S302-3-5-1-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a reel rotation start acceptance command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a reel rotation start acceptance command. If it is determined that the received command is a reel rotation start acceptance command (step S302-3-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6, and the received command Is determined not to be a reel rotation start acceptance command (step S302-3-1-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-7.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data based on the reel rotation start acceptance command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-6 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-7)
In step S302-3-1-7, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a reel stop command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a reel stop command. If it is determined that the received command is a reel stop command (step S302-3-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-8, and the received command is a reel stop command. If it is determined that the command is not a stop command (step S302-3-1-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-9.

(Step S302-3-1-8)
In step S302-3-1-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel stop command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data at the time of reel stop based on the reel stop command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-8 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-9-1-9)
In step S302-3-9-1-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a display determination command. If it is determined that the received command is a display determination command (step S302-3-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is not a determination command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-11.

(Step S302-3-1-1-10)
In step S302-3-1-1-10, the sub CPU 402 performs display determination command reception processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data based on the display determination command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-1-11)
In step S302-3-1-1-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a re-game operation command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a regame operation command. If it is determined that the received command is a re-game operation command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-12, and the received command is If it is determined that the command is not a re-game operation command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-1-12)
In step S302-3-1-1-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a re-game operation command reception process. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data based on the re-game operation command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-12 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-1-13)
In step S302-3-1-1-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a gaming state command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a gaming state command. If it is determined that the received command is a gaming state command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-14, and the received command is a game. If it is determined that the command is not a status command (step S302-3-1-13 = No), the process proceeds to S302-3-1-15.

(Step S302-3-1-1-14)
In step S302-3-1-1-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a game state command reception process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data based on the gaming state command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-14 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-1-15)
In step S302-3-1-1-15, the sub CPU 402 performs processing according to the received command. Specifically, when the command received from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a medal automatic insertion command, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining effect data at the time of automatic medal insertion. When the received command is a medal insertion command, processing for determining effect data at the time of medal insertion is performed. When the received command is a medal settlement command, processing for determining effect data at the time of medal settlement is performed. When the received command is a reel rotation start command, processing for determining effect data at the start of reel rotation is performed. If the received command is a medal payout command, processing for determining effect data at the time of medal payout is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-15 ends, the effect content determination process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Reel rotation start acceptance command reception processing)
Next, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1 in FIG. 81 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a reel rotation start acceptance command.

(Step S302-3-1-6-1)
In step S302-3-1-6-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining again the number of bonus preparation state transition games. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-6-2.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “01” to “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “01” to “03” based on values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. When it is determined that the state numbers are “01” to “03” (step S302-3-6-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” to “03” (step S302-3-6-1-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3, the sub CPU 402 performs normal state processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 84. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-6-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-4-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “04” to “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “04” to “05” based on values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. If it is determined that the state numbers are “04” to “05” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5. If it is determined that the state number is not “04” to “05” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a precursor stage process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5 is completed, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “06” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “06” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “06” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-8.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing mode process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing lottery process or the like performed based on information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-6-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-8, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “07” to “09”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “07” to “09” based on values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. If it is determined that the state numbers are “07” to “09” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9. If it is determined that the state number is not “07” to “09” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-10. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-1-6-10)
In step S302-3-6-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state numbers are “10” to “12”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “10” to “12” based on values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. If it is determined that the state numbers are “10” to “12” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11. If it is determined that the status number is not “10” to “12” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-12. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11)
In step S302-3-1-6-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a processing for the Bonus state during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6-12, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “13”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “13” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “13” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “13” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-14.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-14)
In step S302-3-6-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state numbers are “14” to “15”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “14” to “15” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. If it is determined that the state numbers are “14” to “15” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15. If it is determined that the state number is not “14” to “15” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-16. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the ART game when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “04” to “08”. The processing to do is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-16, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “16” to “17”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state numbers are “16” to “17” based on values stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. When it is determined that the state numbers are “16” to “17” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17. If it is determined that the status number is not “16” to “17” (step S302-3-6-1-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18. .

(Step S302-3-1-6-17)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the ART game when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “04” to “08”. The processing to do is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18)
In step S302-3-6-1-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a promotion lottery process using the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42) in the case of the Bonus preparation state A or the Bonus preparation state B. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 is completed, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process performed by the process of Step S302-3-1-6-1 of FIG. 82 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number reset flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is ON. If it is determined that the Bonus ready state transition game number reset flag is ON (step S302-3-6-1-Yes = Yes), step S302-3-1-6-1-2 is performed. When it is determined that the Bonus ready state transition game number reset flag is not ON (step S302-3-6-1-1-1 = No), the Bonus ready state transition game number reset process is performed. The process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6-2 of the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-1-2)
In step S302-3-6-1-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the number of bonus preparation state transition games based on the reset bonus preparation state transition game number determination table provided in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 40). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-3-1.

(Step S302-3-6-1-3-1)
In step S302-3-6-1-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 sets the Bonus preparation state transition game number determined by the Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process in Step S302-3-6-1-2 to the Bonus provided in the sub RAM 405. A process of overwriting the preparation state transition game number counter is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-3-1 ends, the bonus preparation state transition game number reset process ends, and the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process receives step S302-3-6-1-6. The processing is shifted to 2.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of overwriting the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the Bonus preparation state transition game number storage process. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Never happen. For example, after clearing the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405, the Bonus preparation state determined by the Bonus preparation state transition game number redetermination process in step S302-3-6-1-1-2. The transfer game number may be set in the Bonus ready state transfer game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 84, the normal state process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-6-3 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-6-1-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “01” (step S302-3-6-1-6-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-2, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-3-3 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. When the process proceeds to 3-4 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-3-3 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-3-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects any one of the Bonus preparation state A, the Bonus preparation state B, and the Bonus preparation state C based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-5.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-3. Perform the process. More specifically, when the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4, the state number provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Processing to update the value of the storage area to “18” is performed. When the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “19”. If the Bonus preparation state C is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-4, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “20”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing mode lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 shifts to the self-releasing mode based on the self-releasing mode lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404, information on the winning area, and the self-releasing mode lottery probability. A lottery to determine whether or not to do. In addition, when it is determined to shift to the self-releasing mode, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number of games that can be played in the self-releasing mode to the value of the self-releasing mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the self-releasing mode is determined by the self-releasing mode lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-3-6. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-8, and is not winning (Step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a precursor stage A transition determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the precursor stage A based on the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-10.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to move to the precursor stage A. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the precursor stage A is determined by the precursor stage A shift determination process of S302-3-6-1-6-9. If it is determined to move to the precursor stage A (step S302-3-6-1-6-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-11, and the precursor If it is determined not to move to stage A (step S302-3-6-1-6-3-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “04” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “04”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-19.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a precursor game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games to be played in the precursor stage A, and stores the determined number of games in a precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a return lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 shifts to the Bonus preparation state based on a return lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command. A process for drawing whether or not to do is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-14.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the return lottery is won as a result of the return lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-13. If it is determined that the return lottery has been won (step S302-3-6-1-6-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15 to return. If it is determined that the lottery is not won (step S302-3-6-1-6-14 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-6-1-6-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16. If it is determined that the state number is not “02” (step S302-3-6-1-6-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-18. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects any one of the Bonus preparation state A, the Bonus preparation state B, and the Bonus preparation state C based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-17)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-17, the sub CPU 402 performs state number update processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-16. Perform the process. More specifically, if the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16, the state number provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Processing to update the value of the storage area to “18” is performed. When the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “19”. If the Bonus preparation state C is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-16, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “20”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-18)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-3-18, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “13” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “13”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-19.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-19)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” to the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-3-20 ends, the normal state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Treatment for precursor stage)
Next, the precursor stage process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-6-5 in FIG. 82 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the precursor stage process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-1)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-2.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “04” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “04” (step S302-3-6-1-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-3. However, if it is determined that the state number is not “04” (step S302-3-6-1-5-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-12. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-4.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-5-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-3, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-4 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. If the process proceeds to 5-5 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5-4 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-5-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects any one of the Bonus preparation state A, the Bonus preparation state B, and the Bonus preparation state C based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the bonus preparation state sorting lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5. Perform the process. More specifically, if the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5, the state number provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Processing to update the value of the storage area to “18” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “19”. If the Bonus preparation state C is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-5, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “20”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing mode lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 shifts to the self-releasing mode based on the self-releasing mode lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404, information on the winning area, and the self-releasing mode lottery probability. A lottery to determine whether or not to do. In addition, when it is determined to shift to the self-releasing mode, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number of games that can be played in the self-releasing mode to the value of the self-releasing mode game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-8.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the self-releasing mode is determined by the self-releasing mode lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-5-7. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-9, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-5-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-10.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “06” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “06”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-5-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-1, and as a result, the value of the precursor game number counter becomes “0”. A process of determining whether or not has been performed is performed. If it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5-10 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-5-11 is performed. When it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-10 = No), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. The processing is shifted to 5-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-14.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-5-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART game number counter by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-12, and as a result, the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”. A process of determining whether or not has been performed is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5-14 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-5-15 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-14 = No), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. The process proceeds to 5-16.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-5-16, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter by the process of Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-13. To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-16 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. If the process proceeds to 5-17 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-16 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-5-19.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. More specifically, the sub CPU 402, based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404, the Bonus preparation state A during ART, the Bonus preparation state B during ART, and the Bonus preparation state during ART. A process for determining one of C is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-5-18.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-18)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-18, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-17. Perform the process. More specifically, when the Bonus preparation state A during ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery processing in Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17, it is provided in the sub RAM 405. Processing to update the value of the state number storage area to “21” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state B during ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17, the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. The process of updating the value of “22” to “22” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state C in ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17, the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. The process of updating the value of to 23 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-19)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-5-19, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-1, and as a result, the value of the precursor game number counter becomes “0”. A process of determining whether or not has been performed is performed. If it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5-19 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-5-20 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-19 = No), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. The processing is shifted to 5-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-20)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-20, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “13” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “13”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-21.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-5-21)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-5-21, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-5-21 ends, the precursor stage process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Self-releasing mode processing)
Next, based on FIG. 86, the self-releasing mode processing performed by the processing of step S302-3-6-1-7 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the self-releasing mode processing.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-1)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-2.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-7-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-1, and as a result, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-7-2 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. If the process proceeds to 7-3 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-7-2 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-7-5.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects any one of the Bonus preparation state A, the Bonus preparation state B, and the Bonus preparation state C based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-4.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-1-6-7-3. Perform the process. More specifically, if the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3, the state number provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Processing to update the value of the storage area to “18” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “19”. When the Bonus preparation state C is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-7-3, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “20”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the self-release mode game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a self-releasing lottery based on a self-releasing lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 404 and a winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of performing the self-releasing lottery process in step S302-3-1-6-7-6. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects any one of the Bonus preparation state A, the Bonus preparation state B, and the Bonus preparation state C based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-7-8. Perform the process. More specifically, if the Bonus preparation state A is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8, the state number provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Processing to update the value of the storage area to “18” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state B is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “19”. When the Bonus preparation state C is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-7-8, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. Is updated to “20”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-10.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-7-10, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the value of the self-release mode game number counter to “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting the value of the self-release mode game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 to “0”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-7-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the self-release mode game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the self-release mode game number counter in the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-5. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the self-release mode game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-7-11 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-7. If the process proceeds to -12 and it is determined that the value of the self-release mode game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-11 = No), step S302-3- The process proceeds to 1-6-7-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-7-13 ends, the self-releasing mode process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Bonus state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 87, the Bonus state process performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1-9 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-1)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “07”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “07” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “07” (step S302-3-6-1-9-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “07” (step S302-3-6-1-6-9-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-5. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-2)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the number of navigation stocks based on the Bonus state A ART lottery table (see FIG. 44) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-3.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-9-2. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-9-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-4, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of navigation stocks acquired by the navigation stock lottery process of S302-3-6-1-6-9-2 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “08”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “08” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “08” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-6. If it is determined that the state number is not “08” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-12. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03” is being executed. . Specifically, the sub PCU 402 determines that the information related to the turning effect included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “turning effect 02-02” or “turning effect” by the game information storage process of step S302-2. 02-03 ”, and a process of determining whether or not to execute“ rotating effect 02-02 ”or“ rotating effect 02-03 ”is performed. If it is determined that the “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03” is being executed (step S302-3-6-1-6-6 = Yes), step The process proceeds to S302-3-1-6-9-7, and when it is determined that it is not at the time of executing “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03” (step S302). -3-1-6-9-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-8.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not “rotating drum effect 02-01” is being executed. Specifically, in the sub PCU 402, the information related to the spinning effect included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “rotating effect 02-01” by the game information storing process in step S302-2, and “ It is determined whether or not it is time to execute “rotating effect 02-01”. And when it determines with it being the time of execution of "rotation effect 02-01" (step S302-3-1-6-9-8 = Yes), step S302-3-1-6-9- If the processing is shifted to 9 and it is determined that it is not at the time of executing the “rotor effect 02-01” (step S302-3-6-1-9-8 = No), step S302-3-1 The process proceeds to -6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-9, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART game number determination state based on the revival lottery table stored in the sub ROM 404 (see FIG. 43). Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-10.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-10)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning result is determined as a result of the lottery process based on the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-9-9. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-9 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-11, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-9-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-11 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-12, the sub CPU 402 performs navigation stock addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 shifts to the ART game number determination state based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning result is determined as a result of the lottery process in the navigation stock addition lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-9-12. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-13 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-14, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-9-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-14)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “2” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-16.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-9-16 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-9 is performed. If the process proceeds to -17 and it is determined that the value of the bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-9-16 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to -3-1-6-9-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-17, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the navigation stock number is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-6-1-9-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-18. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-6-1-6-9-17 = No), step S302-3-1-6-9-21 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-18)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-18, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “07” or “08”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “07” or “08” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “07” or “08” (step S302-3-6-1-6-18 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-9- If the processing is shifted to 19 and it is determined that the state number is not “07” or “08” (step S302-3-6-1-6-18 = No), step S302-3-1- The process proceeds to 6-9-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-19)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “14” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “14”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-19 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-20)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-9-20, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “15” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “15”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-21)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “02” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “02”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-9-22 ends, the bonus state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Process for Bonus status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 88, the processing for the Bonus state during ART performed by the processing of step S302-3-6-1-11 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for the Bonus state during ART.

(Step S302-3-6-1-11-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-11-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “10”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “10” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “10” (step S302-3-6-1-11-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-11-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “10” (step S302-3-6-1-11-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-5. .

(Step S302-3-1-6-11-2)
In step S302-3-1-6-11-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the number of navigation stocks based on the Bonus state A ART lottery table (see FIG. 44) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-3.

(Step S302-3-6-1-11-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-11-2. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-11-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-11-4, and is not winning If it is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of navigation stocks acquired by the navigation stock lottery process of S302-3-6-1-61-2 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “11”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “11” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When it is determined that the state number is “11” (step S302-3-6-1-6-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-6. If it is determined that the state number is not “11” (step S302-3-6-1-11-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-12. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the “rotation effect 02-02” or the “rotation effect 02-03” is being executed. . Specifically, in the sub PCU 402, the information related to the spinning effect stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is “rotating effect 02-02” or “rotating effect 02-03”. A process of determining whether or not it is time to execute “rotating effect 02-02” or “rotating effect 02-03” is performed. If it is determined that the “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03” is being executed (step S302-3-6-1-11-6 = Yes), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S302-3-6-1-6-11-7, and when it is determined that it is not at the time of executing “rotating effect 02-02” or “rotating effect 02-03” (step S302). -3-1-6-11-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-11-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the “rotation effect 02-01” is being executed. Specifically, in the sub PCU 402, the information related to the spinning effect included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “rotating effect 02-01” by the game information storing process in step S302-2, and “ It is determined whether or not it is time to execute “rotating effect 02-01”. And when it determines with it being the time of execution of "rotation effect 02-01" (step S302-3-6-1-6-8 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-11- If the processing is shifted to 9 and it is determined that it is not at the time of executing the “rotor effect 02-01” (step S302-3-6-1-11-8 = No), step S302-3-1 The process proceeds to -6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-9, the sub CPU 402 performs ART game number addition state transition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART game number addition state based on the reversion lottery table (see FIG. 43) stored in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-10.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-10)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning is obtained as a result of the lottery by the ART game number additional state transition lottery process in step S302-3-1-6-11-9. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-10 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-11, and is not winning (Step S302-3-6-1-6-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-12, the sub CPU 402 performs navigation stock addition lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 shifts to the ART game number determination state based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Whether or not to draw. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-13.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning result is obtained as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process at step S302-3-6-1-11-12. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-14, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-14)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “2” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “2” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-16.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-16)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15, and as a result, the bonus state Processing for determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-16 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-11 is performed. When the process proceeds to -17 and it is determined that the value of the bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-11-16 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-6-11-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-17)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-17, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-18. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-17 = No), step S302-3-6-1-6-11-21 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-18)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-18, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “10” or “11”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “10” or “11” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the status number is “10” or “11” (step S302-3-6-1-6-11-18 = Yes), step S302-3-1-6-11- If the processing is shifted to 19 and it is determined that the state number is not “10” or “11” (step S302-3-6-1-11-18 = No), step S302-3-1-1 The processing is shifted to 6-11-20.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-19)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “16” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “16”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-20)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-20, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “17” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “17”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-20 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-21)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-11-22 ends, the bonus state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(ART game processing)
Next, based on FIG. 89, the ART game process performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 89 shows a subroutine for the ART game process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-63-1)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-2.

(Step S302-3-1-6-13-2)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the bonus preparation state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13.

(Step S302-3-1-6-13-3)
In step S302-3-1-6-13-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter in the process of Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-2. To determine whether or not becomes “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-13 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. If the process proceeds to 13-4 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-3 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-13-6.

(Step S302-3-1-6-13-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process. More specifically, the sub CPU 402, based on the Bonus preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 41) provided in the sub ROM 404, the Bonus preparation state A during ART, the Bonus preparation state B during ART, and the Bonus preparation state during ART. A process for determining one of C is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-5.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-5, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 updates the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-13-5. Perform the process. More specifically, when the Bonus preparation state A during ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-4, it is provided in the sub RAM 405. Processing to update the value of the state number storage area to “21” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state B in ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-4, the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. The process of updating the value of “22” to “22” is performed. If the Bonus preparation state C in ART is determined as a result of the Bonus preparation state distribution lottery process in Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-4, the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is determined. The process of updating the value of to 23 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-6, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to increase the number of ART games based on the ART game number additional lottery table (see FIG. 47) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning result is determined as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of ART games in step S302-3-6-1-6-6. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-8, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-13-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-8, the sub CPU 402 performs ART game number addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games won in the lottery process by adding the number of ART games in step S302-3-6-1-6-6 to the value of the ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART game number counter by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13. As a result, the value of the ART game number counter becomes “0”. Processing to determine whether or not When it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-13 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6-13-10 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-6-1-6-9 = No), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. The processing is shifted to 13-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-10)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-13-11 ends, the ART game process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(ART game number determination state processing)
Next, the ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15 of FIG. 82 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-15-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning area is any one of “04” to “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is any one of “04” to “06”. Processing to determine whether or not there is is performed. If it is determined that the winning area is any of “04” to “06” (step S302-3-6-1-15-1 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. When the process proceeds to 15-2 and it is determined that the winning area is not any of “04” to “06” (step S302-3-6-1-15-1 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-15-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-6-15-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S302-3-6-1-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-3. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-6-1-6-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the navigation stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-4.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery of the number of games to be added based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-5.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games to be added determined by the ART game number determination process in step S302-3-6-1-6-15 to an ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. And store it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of navigation stocks based on the ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table (see FIG. 46) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery to determine whether or not to add. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stock in step S302-3-6-1-6-15 is won. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-1-6-15-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-8, and is not winning. Is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-15-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock number addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of navigation stocks won in the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S302-3-6-1-6-15-6 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Process to store. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-15-9 ends, the ART game number determination state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Process for adding the number of ART games)
Next, based on FIG. 91, the ART game number addition state process performed by the process of step S302-3-6-1-17 in FIG. 82 will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for adding the number of ART games.

(Step S302-3-6-1-17-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-1-17-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning area is any one of “04” to “06”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is any one of “04” to “06”. Processing to determine whether or not there is is performed. When it is determined that the winning area is any of “04” to “06” (step S302-3-6-1-17-1 = Yes), step S302-3-6-1-6 is performed. When the process proceeds to 17-2 and it is determined that the winning area is not any of “04” to “06” (step S302-3-6-1-17-1 = No), step S302- The process proceeds to 3-1-6-17-6.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-2)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is “1” or more (step S302-3-6-1-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-3. If it is determined that the number of navigation stocks is not “1” or more (step S302-3-6-1-6-17-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-6-17-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the navigation stock. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-4.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs lottery of the number of games to be added based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 45) stored in the sub ROM 404. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-5.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game number update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games to be added determined by the ART game number determination process in step S302-3-6-1-6-17 to an ART game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. And store it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of navigation stocks based on the ART game number determination state navigation stock lottery table (see FIG. 46) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. A lottery to determine whether or not to add. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning result is determined as a result of the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S302-3-6-1-6-17-6. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-17-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-8, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-17-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a navigation stock number addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of navigation stocks selected by the lottery process by adding the number of navigation stocks in step S302-3-6-1-6-17-6 to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Process to store. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 38) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-17-9 ends, the ART game number determination state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, the Bonus preparation state process performed by the process of Step S302-3-1-6-18 of FIG. 82 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-6-1-18-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-6-18-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “18”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “18” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “18” (step S302-3-6-1-18-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-18-2. If it is determined that the state number is not “18” (step S302-3-6-1-18-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-5. .

(Step S302-3-1-6-18-2)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-2, the sub CPU 402 performs promotion lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42A) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-3.

(Step S302-3-1-6-18-3)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-2. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-18 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-4, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-18-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-4)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus preparation state B by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-2, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is set to “ 19 "is updated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus preparation state C by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-2, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is set to “20”. Perform the update process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-5)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “19”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “19” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “19” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18. If it is determined that the status number is not “19” (step S302-3-6-1-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-9. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-6)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-6, the sub CPU 402 performs promotion lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42B) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-7.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-7)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-6. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-8, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-18-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-8)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus preparation state C by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-6, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “ To update to "20". Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-9)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “21”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “21” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the status number is “21” (step S302-3-6-1-6-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-10. If it is determined that the state number is not “21” (step S302-3-6-1-6-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-13. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-10)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42A) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-11.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-11)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-11, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-10. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-12, and is not winning Is determined (step S302-3-1-6-18-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-12)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-12, the sub CPU 402 performs state number update processing. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus ready state B during ART by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-10, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is displayed. Is updated to “22”. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus ready state C during ART by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-10, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is set to “23”. To update to "". Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-13)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “22”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “22” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “22” (step S302-3-6-1-6-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-14. If it is determined that the state number is not “22” (step S302-3-6-1-6-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17. .

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-14)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 42B) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the winning area determined by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-15.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-15)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is obtained as a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-6-1-6-14. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-6-1-6-15 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-16, and is not winning If it is determined (step S302-3-6-1-6-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-16)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a state number update process. Specifically, when the sub CPU 402 is promoted to the Bonus preparation state C by the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-14, the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is set to “ 23 "is updated. Then, when the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17.

(Step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17)
In step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 displays the effect determination table (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 404, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, and the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-6-1-6-18-17 ends, the Bonus preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 93, the display determination command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-10 of FIG. 81 will be described. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of display determination command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether a combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay, the blue 7 replay, or the follow replay is displayed on the active line based on information included in the display determination command. . If it is determined that a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-1-10 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2. If it is determined that the red 7 replay, the blue 7 replay, and the follow replay are not displayed (step S302-3-1-1-10 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-3. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-10-2, the sub CPU 402 performs red / blue 7 / follow replay display processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the state number based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-3)
In step S302-3-1-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to the RUSH replay is displayed on the active line based on the information included in the display determination command. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is displayed (step S302-3-10-3 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-4, and the RUSH replay is displayed. If it is determined that it is not present (step S302-3-1-10-3 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-5.

(Step S302-3-1-10-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a RUSH replay display process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the state number based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line based on information included in the display determination command. And when it determines with the blank being displayed (step S302-3-1-10-5 = YES), a process transfers to step S302-3-1-1-10-6, and the blank is not displayed. Is determined (step S302-3-1-10-5 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-6)
In step S302-3-1-10-6, the sub CPU 402 performs blank display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of updating the state number based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7.

(Step S302-3-1-10-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-7, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, sub CPU402 performs the process which determines an effect based on the combination etc. which were determined at the time of reel rotation start reception command reception, and the symbol displayed on the effective line. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-7 is completed, the display determination command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Red 7 / Blue 7 / Follow replay display process)
Next, based on FIG. 94, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display time process performed by the process of step S302-3-10-2 of FIG. 93 will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for displaying red 7, blue 7, and follow replay.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning area is “07”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning area is “07” based on information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command. If it is determined that the winning area is “07” (step S302-3-1-10-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-2. If it is determined that the winning area is not “07” (step S302-3-1-10-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-4. To do.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 and storing it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “09” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “09”. When the process of step S302-3-10-2-3 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-10-2-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “18” or “21”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “18” or “21” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “18” or “21” (step S302-3-1-1-2-4 = Yes), step S302-3-1-10-2- If the status number is determined not to be “18” or “21” (step S302-3-1-1-2-4 = No), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. The process proceeds to 10-2-9.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “20” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “18”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “18” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. When it is determined that the state number is “18” (step S302-3-10-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-7. If it is determined that the state number is not “18” (step S302-3-10-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-8. .

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-7)
In step S302-3-1-1-2-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “07” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “07”. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-7 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-8)
In step S302-3-1-1-2-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “10” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “10”. When the processing of step S302-3-10-2-8 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and the display determination command reception processing step S302-3-10-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “19” or “22”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “19” or “22” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “19” or “22” (step S302-3-1-1-2-9 = Yes), step S302-3-1-10-2- When the process is shifted to 10 and it is determined that the state number is not “19” or “22” (step S302-3-1-10-2-9 = No), step S302-3-1-1 The process proceeds to 10-2-14.

(Step S302-3-1-10-2-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-10, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-11.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-2-11, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “19”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “19” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “19” (step S302-3-1-1-2-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-12. If it is determined that the state number is not “19” (step S302-3-1-1-2-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-13. .

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-12, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “08” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “08”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-12 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-13)
In step S302-3-1-1-2-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “11” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “11”. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-13 ends, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process ends, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-14)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-2-14, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “20” or “23”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number “20” or “23” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “20” or “23” (step S302-3-10-2-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-10-2- 15, and when it is determined that the state number is not “20” or “23” (step S302-3-10-2-14 = No), red 7, blue 7, follow The replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-15)
In step S302-3-1-1-2-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “3” to the number of navigation stocks. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing of adding “3” to the navigation stock storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 and storing it. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-16.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-16, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “48” to the value of the Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-17.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-10-17, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “20”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “20” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “20” (step S302-3-10-2-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-18. If it is determined that the state number is not “20” (step S302-3-10-2-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-2-19. .

(Step S302-3-10-2-18)
In step S302-3-1-1-2-18, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting "09" as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “09”. When the process of step S302-3-10-2-18 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(Step S302-3-1-1-2-19)
In step S302-3-1-10-2-19, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “12” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “12”. When the process of step S302-3-10-2-19 is completed, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process is terminated, and the display determination command reception process step S302-3-1-1-10 is completed. The process is shifted to -7.

(RUSH replay display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 95, the RUSH replay display time process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-10-4 of FIG. 94 will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a subroutine for RUSH replay display processing.

(Step S302-3-1-10-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is any one of “14” to “17”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether any of state numbers “14” to “17” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is any one of “14” to “17” (step S302-3-1-10-4-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-10- When the process proceeds to 4-2 and it is determined that the state number is not any of “14” to “17” (step S302-3-10-4-1 = No), the RUSH replay display is performed. The time process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-10-7 of the display determination command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-10-4-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “13” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “13”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-10-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-10-4-3)
In step S302-3-1-10-4-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games until the transition to the Bonus ready state during ART based on the Bonus ready state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) provided in the sub ROM 404. A process of storing in the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the RAM 405 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-4-3 is completed, the RUSH replay display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7 of the display determination command reception process. To do.

(Blank display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 96, the blank display time process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-10-6 in FIG. 93 will be described. FIG. 96 shows a subroutine for blank display processing.

(Step S302-3-1-1-10-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-10-6-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “02” or “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” or “03” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” or “03” (step S302-3-1-10-6-1 = Yes), step S302-3-1-10-6-2 is performed. If it is determined that the status number is not “02” or “03” (step S302-3-10-6-1 = No), the blank display processing is terminated and displayed. The processing shifts to step S302-3-1-10-7 of the determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-1-10-6-2)
In step S302-3-1-1-10-6-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-6-3.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-6-3)
In step S302-3-1-1-6-6-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for clearing the bonus preparation state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of clearing a bonus preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-10-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-6-4.

(Step S302-3-1-1-6-6-4)
In step S302-3-1-10-6-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a Bonus preparation state transition game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state based on the Bonus preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 39) provided in the sub ROM 404, and stores it in the sub RAM 405. A process of storing in the provided bonus preparation state transition game number counter is performed. When the process of step S302-3-1-1-6-6-4 is completed, the blank display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-10-7 of the display determination command reception process. .

(Processing when various switches are detected)
Next, various switch detection tasks will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S307-1)
In step S307-1, the sub CPU 402 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for initializing a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S307-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-2.

(Step S307-2)
In step S307-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a non-game is being played. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game is in a non-game other than the period from when the medal insertion command or the automatic medal insertion command is received until the display command is received. If it is determined that the game is not being played (step S307-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-3. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not waiting (step S307-2 = No), the processing according to step S307-2 is repeatedly performed until the game is not being played.

(Step S307-3)
In step S <b> 307-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of an effect button has been detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect button detection switch 18sw has detected an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. When it is determined that the operation of the effect button has been detected (step S307-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-4, and when it is determined that the operation of the effect button has not been detected. (Step S307-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S307-2.

(Step S307-4)
In step S307-4, the sub CPU 402 performs menu screen display processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting a command for displaying a menu image in an effect control board transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S307-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-5.

  The menu displayed in this embodiment includes (a) adjusting the volume output from the speakers 34 and 35, (b) reselecting the character, (c) resetting the value of the Bonus preparation state transition game number counter, and the like. Is provided. Here, the Bonus ready state transition game number counter is reset when the menu is selected, the Bonus ready state transition game number reset flag is turned ON, and the Bonus ready state transition game number counter value is changed to the Bonus ready state transition game number counter. It is redetermined by the game number redetermination process, and is stored by the Bonus preparation state transition game number storage process.

(Step S307-5)
In step S307-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not an operation of the cross key is detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the cross key detection switch 19sw has detected an operation of the cross key 19 by the player. If it is determined that the operation of the cross key is detected (step S307-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-6, and if it is determined that the operation of the cross key is not detected. (Step S307-5 = No), the process proceeds to Step S307-7.

(Step S307-6)
In step S307-6, the sub CPU 402 performs cursor movement processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 is provided with a command for moving and displaying the cursor displayed on the menu image on the sub RAM 405 based on the key corresponding to the direction in which the operation is detected among the cross keys 19. A process of setting the effect control board transmission data storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S307-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-7.

(Step S307-7)
In step S307-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation of the effect button has been detected. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect button detection switch 18sw has detected an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. When it is determined that the operation of the effect button has been detected (step S307-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S307-8, and when it is determined that the operation of the effect button has not been detected. (Step S307-7 = No), the process according to Step S307-7 is repeated until the operation of the effect button 18 is detected.

(Step S307-8)
In step S307-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a selection menu determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines a menu to be selected based on the current cursor position among the menus displayed in the menu image, and information related to the determined menu is provided in the sub RAM 405. A process of storing in the selected menu information storage area is performed. In addition, based on the current cursor position, processing for setting a command for displaying that the menu to be selected has been determined is set in the effect control board transmission data storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S307-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-9.

(Step S307-9)
In step S307-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a selection menu execution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing corresponding to the information stored in the selection menu information storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 in the processing of step S307-8. Then, when the process of step S307-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S307-2.

(Timing chart showing transition of RT gaming state)
Next, a timing chart showing the transition of the RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  In FIG. 98, as a premise, when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the normal state, the value of the Bonus ready state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0” and is managed by the sub CPU 402. It is assumed that the state has shifted to the Bonus preparation state B.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 98 (a), the sub CPU 402 determines that the combination of symbols related to “preparation replay” is valid when any of the winning areas “08” to “11” is determined by the internal lottery process. Control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 to be displayed on the line. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state based on the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” being displayed on the valid line.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (b), when the winning area “01” is determined by the internal lottery process, the sub CPU 402 indicates that the left stop button 11 is to be stopped first. Control to display on the screen. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the right stop button 13 is first stopped. Then, the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 as displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 02” or “Follow Replay” is displayed on the active line. Based on this, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. At this time, the state managed by the sub CPU 402 shifts from the Bonus preparation state B to the Bonus state B.

  In addition, at the timing of FIG. 98 (b), the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “48” to the spinning drum effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 98 (c), when any of the winning areas “20” to “27” is determined by the internal lottery process, the sub CPU 402 uses the symbol combination related to “Bell”. The operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 to be displayed on the line is notified, but the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 in the operation order not following the notification, and the “blank” is concerned. Assume that a combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. In this case, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (d), the sub CPU 402 determines that the combination of symbols related to “preparation replay” is valid when any of the winning areas “08” to “11” is determined by the internal lottery process. Control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 to be displayed on the line. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state based on the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” being displayed on the valid line.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (e), when the winning area “01” is determined by the internal lottery process, the sub CPU 402 indicates that the right stop button 13 is to be stopped first. Control to display on the screen. Further, in a later-described internal lottery process, when the winning area “02” is determined, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the left stop button 11 is first stopped. Then, the player operates the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 as displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 01”, “Red 7 Replay 03”, or “Follow Replay”. Based on the fact that is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the winning area “01” is determined, the main CPU 301 determines whether the left stop button 11 is first stopped and when the winning area “02” is determined. When the right stop button 13 is first stopped, a process of setting “48” to the spinning drum effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when the winning area “01” is determined, the main CPU 301 sets the left stop button 11 first when the right stop button 13 is first stopped and when the winning area “02” is determined. When the stop operation is performed, the process of setting “48” to the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is not performed.

  For this reason, at the timing of FIG. 98 (b), a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 02” or “Follow Replay” is displayed on the active line, and the spinning effect 02 lottery game provided in the main RAM 303 After “48” is set in the number counter, the winning area “01” or “02” is determined before the value of the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “0”. Button for displaying a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 01”, “Red 7 Replay 03”, or a combination of symbols excluding a part of “Follow Replay” on the active line. , 13 is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Thereby, the main CPU 301 first executes the rotation effect 02 when the value set in the rotation effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “0”. , No discrepancies with production. Further, the main control board 300 does not need to set “48” in the spinning effect 02 lottery game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, so that the burden on the main control board 300 is not increased.

(Reel operation when "Rotating drum effect 02-01" is executed)
Next, based on FIG. 99, the operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing "rotation effect 02-01" is demonstrated.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), when executing the “rotor effect 02-01”, the main CPU 301 detects that the start lever 10 has been operated by the start switch 10sw. Based on the above, control is performed to swing the reel 17 in the vertical direction for a predetermined time (predetermined number of times).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control to end the control of swinging the reel 17 in the vertical direction. Here, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display an image prompting the operation of the start lever 10 on the liquid crystal display device 46 again.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), the main CPU 301 performs a wait process for a predetermined time based on the operation of the start lever 10 detected by the start switch 10sw.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the forward rotation direction.

(Reel operation when "Rotating drum effect 02-02" is executed)
Next, based on FIG. 100, the operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing "rotation effect 02-02" is demonstrated.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when executing the “rotating effect 02-02”, the main CPU 301 detects that the start lever 10 is operated by the start switch 10sw. Based on the above, control is performed to swing the reel 17 in the vertical direction for a predetermined time (predetermined number of times).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100C, the main CPU 301 performs control to end the control of swinging the reel 17 in the vertical direction. Here, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display an image prompting the operation of the start lever 10 on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the reverse rotation direction.

(Reel operation when "Rotating drum effect 02-03" is executed)
Next, based on FIG. 101, the operation | movement of the reel at the time of performing "rotation effect 02-03" is demonstrated.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the main CPU 301 detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw when executing the “rotating effect 02-03”. Based on the above, control is performed to swing the reel 17 in the vertical direction for a predetermined time (predetermined number of times).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), the main CPU 301 performs control to end the control of swinging the reel 17 in the vertical direction. Here, the sub CPU 402 performs control to display an image prompting the operation of the start lever 10 on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (d), the main CPU 301 performs a wait process for a predetermined time based on the operation of the start lever 10 being detected by the start switch 10sw.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (e), the main CPU 301 performs control to rotate the reel 17 in the reverse rotation direction.

  As described above, the “rotor effect 02-01”, “rotor effect 02-02”, and “rotor effect 02-03” cause the reel 17 to swing for a predetermined time (predetermined number of times) and end the swing. The operation of the reel 17 is different after the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the “rotor effect 02-01” is executed)
Next, based on FIG. 102, the animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the time of executing the spinning effect 02-01 will be described.

  As a premise, when the “rotating drum effect 02-01” is executed by the main control board 300, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of ART games based on the resurrection lottery table (see FIG. 43) provided in the sub ROM 404. Alternatively, it is assumed that a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART game number addition state is performed, and that the winning B is determined as a result of the lottery.

  First, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the sub CPU 402 determines that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw in the state where the “rotating drum effect 02-01” is being executed. Then, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 an image for notifying that the state does not shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), the sub CPU 402 displays an image displayed in the normal state based on the end of the game in which the animation shown in FIG. 102 (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), in the next game, based on the detection of the operation of the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw, the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state is entered. Control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 an image for informing the transition.

  Next, when executing the “rotating drum effect 02-01” by the main control board 300, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of ART games based on the resurrection lottery table (see FIG. 43) provided in the sub ROM 404. Alternatively, a lottery of whether or not to shift to the ART game number addition state is performed, and when winning A is determined as a result of the lottery, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), the sub CPU 402 determines that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw in the state where the “rotating drum effect 02-01” is being executed. Then, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 an image for notifying that the state does not shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (c), the sub CPU 402 detects all operations of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 in the game in which the animation shown in FIG. 102 (a) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. Based on the above, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 an image for notifying the transition to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when transitioning from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state)
Next, an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  As a premise, it is assumed that the winning area “01” is determined at the timing of FIG. In other words, it is assumed that the winning area “01” is determined by the internal lottery process when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is the Bonus state B or the Bonus state B during ART and the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 103, when the winning area “01” is determined at the timing shown in FIG. 99D, the sub CPU 402 combines the symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 01” and “Red 7 Replay 03”. Alternatively, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 for displaying a combination of symbols excluding a part of “follow replay” on the active line. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, the sub CPU 402 operates an image that prompts the user to operate the right stop button 13 first, then the middle stop button 12, and finally the left stop button 11. Control to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning area “01” is determined at the timing of FIG. 99 (d), the right stop button 13 is first operated, then the middle stop button 12 is operated, and finally, Although control is performed to display an image prompting the user to operate the left stop button 11 on the liquid crystal display device 46, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the winning area “01” is determined at the timing of FIG. 99 (d), the right stop button 13 is first operated, then the left stop button 11 is operated, and finally the middle stop button 12 is pressed. Control for displaying an image prompting the user to operate the liquid crystal display device 46 may be performed. Further, the sub CPU 402 first operates the right stop button 13, then operates the middle stop button 12, and finally displays an image prompting the user to operate the left stop button 11 on the liquid crystal display device 46, The right stop button 13 is operated, then the left stop button 11 is operated, and finally, control for determining whether to display an image prompting the user to operate the middle stop button 12 on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed by lottery. It is good.

  In the present embodiment, if the winning area “01” is determined at the timing of FIG. 99D and the right stop button 13 is first operated, the turning effect provided in the main RAM 303 is provided. Since “48” is not set in the 02 lottery game number counter, first, only the image prompting the right stop button 13 to operate is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46, and then the stop button to be operated next. Then, the image prompting the stop button to be operated last may not be displayed.

  Although illustration is omitted, if the winning area “02” is determined at the timing of FIG. 99D, the sub CPU 402 determines the winning area “01” at the timing of FIG. 99D. In the same way as the above, the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 for displaying the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 01”, “Red 7 Replay 03” or “Follow Replay” on the active line is changed. Control to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103, the sub CPU 402 first operates the left stop button 11, then operates the middle stop button 12, and finally prompts the user to operate the right stop button 13. Alternatively, first, the left stop button 11 is operated, then the right stop button 13 is operated, and finally, an image prompting the user to operate the middle stop button 12 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Similarly to the above, the sub CPU 402 first operates the left stop button 11, then operates the middle stop button 12, and finally displays an image prompting the user to operate the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46. It is determined by lottery whether to display an image prompting to operate the left stop button 11, then the right stop button 13, and finally the middle stop button 12 on the liquid crystal display device 46. It is good also as performing control to do.

  Similar to the above, when the winning area “02” is determined at the timing of FIG. 99D, if the left stop button 11 is first operated, the turning effect provided in the main RAM 303 is provided. Since “48” is never set in the 02 lottery game number counter, control is performed to display only an image prompting the left stop button 11 to operate on the liquid crystal display device 46 first, and then the stop button to be operated next. Then, the image prompting the stop button to be operated last may not be displayed.

  Thus, according to the present invention, when it is determined by the main CPU 301 that the main CPU 301 executes the “rotation effect 02-02” or the “rotation effect 02-03”, the number of ART games Control to shift to the determined state or the state where the number of ART games is added is performed. On the other hand, when the main CPU 301 determines that the “rotating drum effect 02-01” is to be executed, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART game based on the resurrection lottery table (see FIG. 43) stored in the sub ROM 404. A lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the number determination state or the ART game number addition state. As a result, the player can maintain a sense of expectation for shifting to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state even when the “rotation effect 02-01” is determined. .

  Further, according to the present invention, when it is decided to execute the “rotation effect 02-02” or the “rotation effect 02-03”, the number of ART games at the timing when the reel 17 rotates in the reverse direction. It is notified that the state is shifted to the determination state or the ART game number addition state. In addition, when it is decided to execute the “rotation effect 02-01” and it is decided to shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state, the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 It is notified that the state shifts to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state at the timing when the operation is performed or when the start lever 10 of the next game is operated. Thereby, even if the player operates the start lever 10 and the reel 17 does not reversely rotate, the player can maintain a sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the reel 17, the display window 21, the stepping motors 101, 102, 103, the reel control board 100, and the main control board 300 constitute the symbol display means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute start operation detection means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the winning combination (winning area) by the internal lottery process constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 46, the sub-control board 400 that controls the liquid crystal display apparatus 46, and the effect control board 410 constitute the information notification means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that performs the spinning effect setting process and the like constitutes the invalidation control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that determines whether or not to execute the spinning effect 02 constitutes the spinning effect execution determining means of the present application.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the spinning effect 02, the main control board 300 that executes the spinning effect 02 constitutes the spinning effect execution control means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state is determined based on the execution of the “rotation effect 02-02” or “rotation effect 02-03”. The sub-control board 400 that performs the control to shift to constitutes the specific state shift control means of the present application.

  Further, in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute “rotation effect 02-01”, whether or not to shift to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state based on the revival lottery table The sub-control board 400 that performs such determination constitutes the specific state transition determination means of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 is an example of information related to the winning combination of the present application.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined that “rotation effect 02” is executed, and a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Replay 02” or a combination of some symbols of “Follow Replay” is on the effective line. The fact that the game of “48” game has been played since being displayed on is an example of the specific condition of the present application.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “rotation effect 02-02” and “rotation effect 02-03” are examples of the first rotation effect of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination state and the ART game number addition state are examples of the specific state of the present application.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “rotor effect 02-01” is an example of the second reel effect of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, when the “rotor effect 02-02” and “rotor effect 02-03” are being executed, the ART game number determination state or the ART game is determined at the timing when the reel 17 rotates backward. The liquid crystal display device 46 and the sub-control board 400 that notify the transition to the added state constitute the first specific state transition notifying means of the present application.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated after the “rotation effect 02-01” is executed, or the timing at which the start lever 10 of the next game is operated. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 46 and the sub-control board 400 for informing that the state shifts to the ART game number determination state or the ART game number addition state constitutes the second specific state transition notification unit of the present application.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the reel 17 rotates reversely when the “rotation effect 02-02” and the “rotation effect 02-03” are executed is an example of the first time of the present application. is there.

  In the present embodiment, after the “rotation effect 02-01” is executed, the timing when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated, the next game in which the “rotation effect 02-01” is executed. The timing at which the start lever 10 is operated is an example of the second timing of the present application.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, although the game machine used for a spinning-reel game machine (slot machine) was demonstrated, you may use for a pachinko game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, and an arrange ball game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Cabinet 2a Hinge mechanism 3 Front door 4 Keyhole 5a, 5b Side lamp 6 Medal slot 7 1BET button 7sw 1BET switch 8 MAX-BET button 8sw MAX-BET switch 9 Settlement button 9sw Settlement switch 10 Start lever 10sw Start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 middle stop button 12sw middle stop switch 13 right stop button 13sw right stop switch 14 stop button unit 15 return button 16 selector 16s medal sensor 17a left reel 17b middle reel 17c right reel 17d reel unit 18 Button 18sw Production button detection switch 19 Cross key 19sw Cross key detection switch 20 Panel 21 Display windows 22a to 22j Production lamp 23 Start lamp 24a -24c BET lamp 25 Stored number display device 26a-26b Game status display lamp 27 Discharged number display device 28 Receivable display lamp 29 Replay display lamp 30a-30c Stop operation sequence display lamp 31 Lumbar panel 32 Sauce unit 33 Medal payout port 34a , 34b Lower speaker 35a, 35b Upper speaker 36 Setting display section 37 Setting change button 37sw Setting change switch 38 External concentration terminal board 39s Selector sensor 40s Reset key sensor 41s Door open sensor 42 Start lever effect lamp 43 Drive board 44 Effect device 45 General-purpose board 46 Liquid crystal display device 100 Reel control boards 101-103 Stepping motor 111s Left reel sensor 112s Middle reel sensor 113s Right reel sensor 200 Relay board 300 Main control board 30 1 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Random number generator 305 I / F circuit 400 Sub control board 401 I / F circuit 402 Sub CPU
403 Random number generator 404 Sub ROM
405 Sub RAM
406 RTC device 410 Production control board 420 Image control unit 421 VDP
422 Liquid crystal control CPU
423 LCD control ROM
424 Liquid crystal control RAM
425 frame counter 426 CGROM
427 VRAM
428 Sound source IC
429 Sound source ROM
430 Lamp Control Unit 431 Lamp Control CPU
432 Lamp control ROM
433 Lamp control RAM
440 Amplifier control board 441 Lower speaker amplifier 442 Upper speaker amplifier 500 Power board 510 Power supply 511 Power button 511sw Power switch 520 Hopper 521 Discharge slit 522 Hopper guide member 523 Guide member 524 Discharge guide member 530 Auxiliary reservoir 530s Auxiliary reservoir Full tank sensor

Claims (1)

A symbol display means for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of symbols;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
The winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the start operation detected by the start operation detecting means;
Information notifying means for notifying information related to the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means;
An invalidation control means for performing a control to invalidate the operation by the player for a predetermined time based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
In a state where the operation by the player is invalidated by the invalidation control means, a rotation effect execution determination means for determining to execute a rotation effect in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is performed;
When it is determined by the turning effect execution determining means to execute the turning effect, the turning effect execution control means for performing control to execute the turning effect,
When it is determined by the spinning performance execution determining means to execute the first spinning performance, the information notification means is in a specific state in which information related to the winning combination is notified over a plurality of games. Specific state transition control means for performing control for transition;
The rotation effect execution determining means executes the rotation effect in the same mode as the first rotation effect until a predetermined timing, and executes the rotation effect in a different mode after the predetermined timing. Specific state transition determining means for determining whether or not to transition to the specific state when it is determined to execute the second spinning effect
In a state in which the first reel-effect by the reel-effect execution control means is being executed, that the control shifts to the specific state is performed by the specific state transition control means later than the predetermined timing A first specific state transition notifying means for notifying during execution of the first turning effect ,
When the transition to the specific state is determined by the specific state transition determining means, the second turning effect is executed so that the control to shift to the specific state is performed by the specific state transition control means. Second specific state transition notifying means for notifying after being done;
With
The specific state transition control means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by performing control to shift to the specific state based on the fact that the specific state shift determining means determines to shift to the specific state.